libpq.sgml 268.7 KB
Newer Older
1
<!-- doc/src/sgml/libpq.sgml -->
2

3 4
<chapter id="libpq">
 <title><application>libpq</application> - C Library</title>
5

6 7 8
 <indexterm zone="libpq">
  <primary>libpq</primary>
 </indexterm>
9

10 11 12
 <indexterm zone="libpq">
  <primary>C</primary>
 </indexterm>
13

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
 <para>
  <application>libpq</application> is the <acronym>C</acronym>
  application programmer's interface to <productname>PostgreSQL</>.
  <application>libpq</> is a set of library functions that allow
  client programs to pass queries to the <productname>PostgreSQL</>
  backend server and to receive the results of these queries.
 </para>

 <para>
  <application>libpq</> is also the underlying engine for several
  other <productname>PostgreSQL</> application interfaces, including
  those written for C++, Perl, Python, Tcl and <application>ECPG</>.
  So some aspects of <application>libpq</>'s behavior will be
  important to you if you use one of those packages.  In particular,
  <xref linkend="libpq-envars">,
  <xref linkend="libpq-pgpass"> and
  <xref linkend="libpq-ssl">
  describe behavior that is visible to the user of any application
  that uses <application>libpq</>.
 </para>

 <para>
  Some short programs are included at the end of this chapter (<xref linkend="libpq-example">) to show how
  to write programs that use <application>libpq</application>.  There are also several
  complete examples of <application>libpq</application> applications in the
  directory <filename>src/test/examples</filename> in the source code distribution.
 </para>

 <para>
  Client programs that use <application>libpq</application> must
  include the header file
  <filename>libpq-fe.h</filename><indexterm><primary>libpq-fe.h</></>
  and must link with the <application>libpq</application> library.
 </para>
48

49
 <sect1 id="libpq-connect">
50
  <title>Database Connection Control Functions</title>
51

52
  <para>
53 54
   The following functions deal with making a connection to a
   <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> backend server.  An
55 56 57
   application program can have several backend connections open at
   one time.  (One reason to do that is to access more than one
   database.)  Each connection is represented by a
T
Tom Lane 已提交
58
   <structname>PGconn</><indexterm><primary>PGconn</></> object, which
59 60
   is obtained from the function <function>PQconnectdb</>,
   <function>PQconnectdbParams</>, or
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
61 62 63 64 65 66
   <function>PQsetdbLogin</>.  Note that these functions will always
   return a non-null object pointer, unless perhaps there is too
   little memory even to allocate the <structname>PGconn</> object.
   The <function>PQstatus</> function should be called to check
   whether a connection was successfully made before queries are sent
   via the connection object.
67

68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77
   <warning>
    <para>
     On Unix, forking a process with open libpq connections can lead to
     unpredictable results because the parent and child processes share
     the same sockets and operating system resources.  For this reason,
     such usage is not recommended, though doing an <function>exec</> from
     the child process to load a new executable is safe.
    </para>
   </warning>

78 79 80
   <note>
    <para>
     On Windows, there is a way to improve performance if a single
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
81
     database connection is repeatedly started and shutdown.  Internally,
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
82 83 84 85
     libpq calls <function>WSAStartup()</> and <function>WSACleanup()</> for connection startup
     and shutdown, respectively.  <function>WSAStartup()</> increments an internal
     Windows library reference count which is decremented by <function>WSACleanup()</>.
     When the reference count is just one, calling <function>WSACleanup()</> frees
86 87
     all resources and all DLLs are unloaded.  This is an expensive
     operation.  To avoid this, an application can manually call
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
88
     <function>WSAStartup()</> so resources will not be freed when the last database
89 90 91
     connection is closed.
    </para>
   </note>
92

93
   <variablelist>
94
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconnectdbparams">
95
     <term><function>PQconnectdbParams</function><indexterm><primary>PQconnectdbParams</></></term>
96 97 98
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Makes a new connection to the database server.
99

100 101 102
<synopsis>
PGconn *PQconnectdbParams(const char **keywords, const char **values, int expand_dbname);
</synopsis>
103 104
      </para>

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
105 106
      <para>
       This function opens a new database connection using the parameters taken
107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114
       from two <symbol>NULL</symbol>-terminated arrays. The first,
       <literal>keywords</literal>, is defined as an array of strings, each one
       being a key word. The second, <literal>values</literal>, gives the value
       for each key word. Unlike <function>PQsetdbLogin</> below, the parameter
       set can be extended without changing the function signature, so use of
       this function (or its nonblocking analogs <function>PQconnectStartParams</>
       and <function>PQconnectPoll</function>) is preferred for new application
       programming.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
115 116
      </para>

117 118 119 120 121 122
      <para>
       When <literal>expand_dbname</literal> is non-zero, the
       <parameter>dbname</parameter> key word value is allowed to be recognized
       as a <parameter>conninfo</parameter> string. See below for details.
      </para>

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
123
      <para>
124 125 126 127
       The passed arrays can be empty to use all default parameters, or can
       contain one or more parameter settings. They should be matched in length.
       Processing will stop with the last non-<symbol>NULL</symbol> element
       of the <literal>keywords</literal> array.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
128 129 130 131 132 133
      </para>

      <para>
       The currently recognized parameter key words are:

       <variablelist>
134
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-host" xreflabel="host">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151
         <term><literal>host</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Name of host to connect to.<indexterm><primary>host name</></>
           If this begins with a slash, it specifies Unix-domain
           communication rather than TCP/IP communication; the value is the
           name of the directory in which the socket file is stored.  The
           default behavior when <literal>host</literal> is not specified
           is to connect to a Unix-domain
           socket<indexterm><primary>Unix domain socket</></> in
           <filename>/tmp</filename> (or whatever socket directory was specified
           when <productname>PostgreSQL</> was built). On machines without
           Unix-domain sockets, the default is to connect to <literal>localhost</>.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

152
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-hostaddr" xreflabel="hostaddr">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161
         <term><literal>hostaddr</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Numeric IP address of host to connect to.  This should be in the
           standard IPv4 address format, e.g., <literal>172.28.40.9</>.  If
           your machine supports IPv6, you can also use those addresses.
           TCP/IP communication is
           always used when a nonempty string is specified for this parameter.
          </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
162

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
163 164
          <para>
           Using <literal>hostaddr</> instead of <literal>host</> allows the
165 166
           application to avoid a host name look-up, which might be important
           in applications with time constraints. However, a host name is
167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190
           required for Kerberos, GSSAPI, or SSPI authentication
           methods, as well as for <literal>verify-full</> SSL
           certificate verification.  The following rules are used:
           <itemizedlist>
            <listitem>
             <para>
              If <literal>host</> is specified without <literal>hostaddr</>,
              a host name lookup occurs.
             </para>
            </listitem>
            <listitem>
             <para>
              If <literal>hostaddr</> is specified without <literal>host</>,
              the value for <literal>hostaddr</> gives the server network address.
              The connection attempt will fail if the authentication
              method requires a host name.
             </para>
            </listitem>
            <listitem>
             <para>
              If both <literal>host</> and <literal>hostaddr</> are specified,
              the value for <literal>hostaddr</> gives the server network address.
              The value for <literal>host</> is ignored unless the
              authentication method requires it, in which case it will be
191
              used as the host name.
192 193 194 195 196
             </para>
            </listitem>
           </itemizedlist>
           Note that authentication is likely to fail if <literal>host</>
           is not the name of the server at network address <literal>hostaddr</>.
197 198
           Also, note that <literal>host</> rather than <literal>hostaddr</>
           is used to identify the connection in <filename>~/.pgpass</> (see
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
199 200
           <xref linkend="libpq-pgpass">).
          </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
201

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209
          <para>
           Without either a host name or host address,
           <application>libpq</application> will connect using a
           local Unix-domain socket; or on machines without Unix-domain
           sockets, it will attempt to connect to <literal>localhost</>.
          </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
210

211
         <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-port" xreflabel="port">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221
          <term><literal>port</literal></term>
          <listitem>
          <para>
           Port number to connect to at the server host, or socket file
           name extension for Unix-domain
           connections.<indexterm><primary>port</></>
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

222
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-dbname" xreflabel="dbname">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
223 224
         <term><literal>dbname</literal></term>
         <listitem>
225
         <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
226
          The database name.  Defaults to be the same as the user name.
227
         </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
228 229
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
230

231
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-user" xreflabel="user">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
232 233
         <term><literal>user</literal></term>
         <listitem>
234
         <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
235 236 237
          <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> user name to connect as.
          Defaults to be the same as the operating system name of the user
          running the application.
238
         </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
239 240
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
241

242
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-password" xreflabel="password">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
243 244
         <term><literal>password</literal></term>
         <listitem>
245
         <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
246
          Password to be used if the server demands password authentication.
247
         </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
248 249
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
250

251
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-connect-timeout" xreflabel="connect_timeout">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
252 253
         <term><literal>connect_timeout</literal></term>
         <listitem>
254
         <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
255 256 257
          Maximum wait for connection, in seconds (write as a decimal integer
          string). Zero or not specified means wait indefinitely.  It is not
          recommended to use a timeout of less than 2 seconds.
258
         </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
259 260 261
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-client-encoding" xreflabel="client_encoding">
         <term><literal>client_encoding</literal></term>
         <listitem>
         <para>
          This sets the <varname>client_encoding</varname>
          configuration parameter for this connection.  In addition to
          the values accepted by the corresponding server option, you
          can use <literal>auto</literal> to determine the right
          encoding from the current locale in the client
          (<envar>LC_CTYPE</envar> environment variable on Unix
          systems).
         </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

277
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-options" xreflabel="options">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
278 279 280
         <term><literal>options</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
281 282 283 284 285
           Adds command-line options to send to the server at run-time.
           For example, setting this to <literal>-c geqo=off</> sets the
           session's value of the <varname>geqo</> parameter to
           <literal>off</>.  For a detailed discussion of the available
           options, consult <xref linkend="runtime-config">.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
286 287 288 289
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-application-name" xreflabel="application_name">
         <term><literal>application_name</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Specifies a value for the <xref linkend="guc-application-name">
           configuration parameter.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-fallback-application-name" xreflabel="fallback_application_name">
         <term><literal>fallback_application_name</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Specifies a fallback value for the <xref
           linkend="guc-application-name"> configuration parameter.
           This value will be used if no value has been given for
           <literal>application_name</> via a connection parameter or the
           <envar>PGAPPNAME</envar> environment variable.  Specifying
           a fallback name is useful in generic utility programs that
           wish to set a default application name but allow it to be
           overridden by the user.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

316 317 318 319
        <varlistentry id="libpq-keepalives" xreflabel="keepalives">
         <term><literal>keepalives</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
320 321 322 323
           Controls whether client-side TCP keepalives are used. The default
           value is 1, meaning on, but you can change this to 0, meaning off,
           if keepalives are not wanted.  This parameter is ignored for
           connections made via a Unix-domain socket.
324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

        <varlistentry id="libpq-keepalives-idle" xreflabel="keepalives_idle">
         <term><literal>keepalives_idle</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
332 333
           Controls the number of seconds of inactivity after which TCP should
           send a keepalive message to the server.  A value of zero uses the
334 335 336 337 338
           system default. This parameter is ignored for connections made via a
           Unix-domain socket, or if keepalives are disabled. It is only supported
           on systems where the <symbol>TCP_KEEPIDLE</> or <symbol>TCP_KEEPALIVE</>
           socket option is available, and on Windows; on other systems, it has no
           effect.
339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

        <varlistentry id="libpq-keepalives-interval" xreflabel="keepalives_interval">
         <term><literal>keepalives_interval</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
347 348
           Controls the number of seconds after which a TCP keepalive message
           that is not acknowledged by the server should be retransmitted.  A
349 350 351 352 353
           value of zero uses the system default. This parameter is ignored for
           connections made via a Unix-domain socket, or if keepalives are disabled.
           It is only supported on systems where the <symbol>TCP_KEEPINTVL</>
           socket option is available, and on Windows; on other systems, it has no
           effect.
354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

        <varlistentry id="libpq-keepalives-count" xreflabel="keepalives_count">
         <term><literal>keepalives_count</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
362 363
           Controls the number of TCP keepalives that can be lost before the
           client's connection to the server is considered dead.  A value of
364 365 366 367
           zero uses the system default. This parameter is ignored for
           connections made via a Unix-domain socket, or if keepalives are disabled.
           It is only supported on systems where the <symbol>TCP_KEEPINTVL</>
           socket option is available; on other systems, it has no effect.
368 369 370 371
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

372
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-tty" xreflabel="tty">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
373 374
         <term><literal>tty</literal></term>
         <listitem>
375
         <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
376
          Ignored (formerly, this specified where to send server debug output).
377
         </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
378 379 380
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

381
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-sslmode" xreflabel="sslmode">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
382 383 384
         <term><literal>sslmode</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
385
           This option determines whether or with what priority a secure
386
           <acronym>SSL</> TCP/IP connection will be negotiated with the
387
           server. There are six modes:
388
          </para>
389

390
          <table id="libpq-connect-sslmode-options">
391
           <title><literal>sslmode</literal> Options</title>
392 393 394 395 396 397 398
           <tgroup cols="2">
            <thead>
             <row>
              <entry>Option</entry>
              <entry>Description</entry>
             </row>
            </thead>
399

400
            <tbody>
401

402 403 404 405
             <row>
              <entry><literal>disable</></entry>
              <entry>only try a non-<acronym>SSL</> connection</entry>
             </row>
406

407 408 409 410
             <row>
              <entry><literal>allow</></entry>
              <entry>first try a non-<acronym>SSL</>
               connection;  if that fails, try an <acronym>SSL</>
411
               connection</entry>
412
             </row>
413

414 415 416 417 418 419
             <row>
              <entry><literal>prefer</> (default)</entry>
              <entry>first try an <acronym>SSL</> connection;  if
              that fails, try a non-<acronym>SSL</>
              connection</entry>
             </row>
420

421 422 423 424
             <row>
              <entry><literal>require</></entry>
              <entry>only try an <acronym>SSL</> connection</entry>
             </row>
425 426 427 428

             <row>
              <entry><literal>verify-ca</></entry>
              <entry>only try an <acronym>SSL</> connection, and verify that
429 430
              the server certificate is issued by a trusted certificate
              authority (<acronym>CA</>)</entry>
431 432 433 434 435 436
             </row>

             <row>
              <entry><literal>verify-full</></entry>
              <entry>only try an <acronym>SSL</> connection, verify that
              the server certificate is issued by a trusted <acronym>CA</> and
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
437
              that the server host name matches that in the certificate</entry>
438 439
             </row>

440 441 442
            </tbody>
           </tgroup>
          </table>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
443

444 445 446 447 448
          <para>
           See <xref linkend="libpq-ssl"> for a detailed description of how
           these options work.
          </para>

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
449
          <para>
450 451
           <literal>sslmode</> is ignored for Unix domain socket
           communication.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
452
           If <productname>PostgreSQL</> is compiled without SSL support,
453 454
           using options <literal>require</>, <literal>verify-ca</>, or
           <literal>verify-full</> will cause an error, while
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
455
           options <literal>allow</> and <literal>prefer</> will be
456
           accepted but <application>libpq</> will not actually attempt
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
457 458 459 460 461 462 463
           an <acronym>SSL</>
           connection.<indexterm><primary>SSL</><secondary
           sortas="libpq">with libpq</></indexterm>
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

464
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-requiressl" xreflabel="requiressl">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485
         <term><literal>requiressl</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           This option is deprecated in favor of the <literal>sslmode</>
           setting.
          </para>

          <para>
           If set to 1, an <acronym>SSL</acronym> connection to the server
           is required (this is equivalent to <literal>sslmode</>
           <literal>require</>).  <application>libpq</> will then refuse
           to connect if the server does not accept an
           <acronym>SSL</acronym> connection.  If set to 0 (default),
           <application>libpq</> will negotiate the connection type with
           the server (equivalent to <literal>sslmode</>
           <literal>prefer</>).  This option is only available if
           <productname>PostgreSQL</> is compiled with SSL support.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

486
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-sslcert" xreflabel="sslcert">
487 488 489 490
         <term><literal>sslcert</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           This parameter specifies the file name of the client SSL
491 492
           certificate, replacing the default
           <filename>~/.postgresql/postgresql.crt</>.
493
           This parameter is ignored if an SSL connection is not made.
494 495 496 497
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

498
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-sslkey" xreflabel="sslkey">
499 500 501
         <term><literal>sslkey</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
502
           This parameter specifies the location for the secret key used for
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
503
           the client certificate. It can either specify a file name that will
504 505 506 507 508 509 510
           be used instead of the default
           <filename>~/.postgresql/postgresql.key</>, or it can specify a key
           obtained from an external <quote>engine</> (engines are
           <productname>OpenSSL</> loadable modules).  An external engine
           specification should consist of a colon-separated engine name and
           an engine-specific key identifier.  This parameter is ignored if an
           SSL connection is not made.
511 512 513 514
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

515
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-sslrootcert" xreflabel="sslrootcert">
516 517 518
         <term><literal>sslrootcert</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
519 520 521 522 523
           This parameter specifies the name of a file containing SSL
           certificate authority (<acronym>CA</>) certificate(s).
           If the file exists, the server's certificate will be verified
           to be signed by one of these authorities.  The default is
           <filename>~/.postgresql/root.crt</>.
524 525 526 527
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

528
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-sslcrl" xreflabel="sslcrl">
529 530 531 532
         <term><literal>sslcrl</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           This parameter specifies the file name of the SSL certificate
533 534 535 536
           revocation list (CRL).  Certificates listed in this file, if it
           exists, will be rejected while attempting to authenticate the
           server's certificate.  The default is
           <filename>~/.postgresql/root.crl</>.
537 538 539 540
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-requirepeer" xreflabel="requirepeer">
         <term><literal>requirepeer</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           For Unix-domain socket connections, if this parameter is
           set, the client checks at the beginning of the connection
           that the server process runs under the specified user name,
           otherwise the connection is aborted with an error.  This
           parameter can be used to achieve the kind of server
           authentication that SSL certificates achieve on TCP/IP
           connections.  (Note that if the Unix-domain socket is
           in <filename>/tmp</filename> or another publically writable
           location, any user could start a server there.  Use this
           parameter to ensure that you are connected to a server run
           by a trusted user,
           e.g., <literal>requirepeer=postgres</literal>.)  This
           option is only supported on some platforms, currently
           Linux, FreeBSD, NetBSD, OpenBSD, and Solaris.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

563
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-krbsrvname" xreflabel="krbsrvname">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575
         <term><literal>krbsrvname</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Kerberos service name to use when authenticating with Kerberos 5
           or GSSAPI.
           This must match the service name specified in the server
           configuration for Kerberos authentication to succeed. (See also
           <xref linkend="kerberos-auth"> and <xref linkend="gssapi-auth">.)
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

576
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-gsslib" xreflabel="gsslib">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586
         <term><literal>gsslib</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           GSS library to use for GSSAPI authentication. Only used on Windows.
           Set to <literal>gssapi</literal> to force libpq to use the GSSAPI
           library for authentication instead of the default SSPI.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

587
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-service" xreflabel="service">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603
         <term><literal>service</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Service name to use for additional parameters.  It specifies a service
           name in <filename>pg_service.conf</filename> that holds additional connection parameters.
           This allows applications to specify only a service name so connection parameters
           can be centrally maintained. See <xref linkend="libpq-pgservice">.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
       </variablelist>

       If  any  parameter is unspecified, then the corresponding
       environment variable (see <xref linkend="libpq-envars">)
       is checked. If the  environment  variable is not set either,
       then the indicated built-in defaults are used.
604
      </para>
605 606

      <para>
607
        If <literal>expand_dbname</literal> is non-zero and
608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622
        <parameter>dbname</parameter> contains an <symbol>=</symbol> sign, it
        is taken as a <parameter>conninfo</parameter> string in exactly the same way as
        if it had been passed to <function>PQconnectdb</function>(see below). Previously
        processed key words will be overridden by key words in the
        <parameter>conninfo</parameter> string.
      </para>

      <para>
        In general key words are processed from the beginning of these arrays in index
        order. The effect of this is that when key words are repeated, the last processed
        value is retained. Therefore, through careful placement of the
        <parameter>dbname</parameter> key word, it is possible to determine what may
        be overridden by a <parameter>conninfo</parameter> string, and what may not.
      </para>

623 624 625
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

626
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconnectdb">
627 628 629 630 631
     <term><function>PQconnectdb</function><indexterm><primary>PQconnectdb</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Makes a new connection to the database server.

632 633 634
<synopsis>
PGconn *PQconnectdb(const char *conninfo);
</synopsis>
635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658
      </para>

      <para>
       This function opens a new database connection using the parameters taken
       from the string <literal>conninfo</literal>.
      </para>

      <para>
       The passed string can be empty to use all default parameters, or it can
       contain one or more parameter settings separated by whitespace.
       Each parameter setting is in the form <literal>keyword = value</literal>.
       Spaces around the equal sign are optional. To write an empty value,
       or a value containing spaces, surround it with single quotes, e.g.,
       <literal>keyword = 'a value'</literal>. Single quotes and backslashes
       within the value must be escaped with a backslash, i.e.,
       <literal>\'</literal> and <literal>\\</literal>.
      </para>

      <para>
       The currently recognized parameter key words are the same as above.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

659
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsetdblogin">
660 661 662 663
     <term><function>PQsetdbLogin</function><indexterm><primary>PQsetdbLogin</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Makes a new connection to the database server.
664
<synopsis>
665 666 667 668 669 670 671
PGconn *PQsetdbLogin(const char *pghost,
                     const char *pgport,
                     const char *pgoptions,
                     const char *pgtty,
                     const char *dbName,
                     const char *login,
                     const char *pwd);
672
</synopsis>
673
       </para>
674

675 676 677 678 679 680
       <para>
        This is the predecessor of <function>PQconnectdb</function> with a fixed
        set of parameters.  It has the same functionality except that the
        missing parameters will always take on default values.  Write <symbol>NULL</symbol> or an
        empty string for any one of the fixed parameters that is to be defaulted.
      </para>
681

682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689
      <para>
        If the <parameter>dbName</parameter> contains an <symbol>=</symbol> sign, it
        is taken as a <parameter>conninfo</parameter> string in exactly the same way as
        if it had been passed to <function>PQconnectdb</function>, and the remaining
        parameters are then applied as above.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
690

691
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsetdb">
692
     <term><function>PQsetdb</function><indexterm><primary>PQsetdb</></></term>
693
     <listitem>
694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704
      <para>
   Makes a new connection to the database server.
<synopsis>
PGconn *PQsetdb(char *pghost,
                char *pgport,
                char *pgoptions,
                char *pgtty,
                char *dbName);
</synopsis>
     </para>

705
     <para>
706 707 708
      This is a macro that calls <function>PQsetdbLogin</function> with null pointers
      for the <parameter>login</> and <parameter>pwd</> parameters.  It is provided
      for backward compatibility with very old programs.
709 710 711
     </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
712

713
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconnectstartparams">
714
     <term><function>PQconnectStartParams</function><indexterm><primary>PQconnectStartParams</></></term>
715 716
     <term><function>PQconnectStart</function><indexterm><primary>PQconnectStart</></></term>
     <term><function>PQconnectPoll</function><indexterm><primary>PQconnectPoll</></></term>
717
     <listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
718 719 720
      <para>
       <indexterm><primary>nonblocking connection</primary></indexterm>
       Make a connection to the database server in a nonblocking manner.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
721

722
<synopsis>
723 724 725
PGconn *PQconnectStartParams(const char **keywords,
                             const char **values,
                             int expand_dbname);
726

727
PGconn *PQconnectStart(const char *conninfo);
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
728

729 730
PostgresPollingStatusType PQconnectPoll(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
731
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
732

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
733
      <para>
734
       These three functions are used to open a connection to a database server such
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
735
       that your application's thread of execution is not blocked on remote I/O
736 737 738 739
       whilst doing so. The point of this approach is that the waits for I/O to
       complete can occur in the application's main loop, rather than down inside
       <function>PQconnectdbParams</> or <function>PQconnectdb</>, and so the
       application can manage this operation in parallel with other activities.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
740
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
741

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
742
      <para>
743 744
       With <function>PQconnectStartParams</function>, the database connection is made
       using the parameters taken from the <literal>keywords</literal> and
745 746
       <literal>values</literal> arrays, and controlled by <literal>expand_dbname</literal>,
       as described above for <function>PQconnectdbParams</function>.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
747
      </para>
748

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
749
      <para>
750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757
       With <function>PQconnectStart</function>, the database connection is made
       using the parameters taken from the string <literal>conninfo</literal> as
       described above for <function>PQconnectdb</function>.
      </para>

      <para>
       Neither <function>PQconnectStartParams</function> nor <function>PQconnectStart</function>
       nor <function>PQconnectPoll</function> will block, so long as a number of
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
758 759
       restrictions are met:
       <itemizedlist>
760 761
        <listitem>
         <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
762 763
          The <literal>hostaddr</> and <literal>host</> parameters are used appropriately to ensure that
          name and reverse name queries are not made. See the documentation of
764
          these parameters under <function>PQconnectdbParams</function> above for details.
765 766
         </para>
        </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
767

768 769
        <listitem>
         <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
770 771
          If you call <function>PQtrace</function>, ensure that the stream object
          into which you trace will not block.
772 773
         </para>
        </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
774

775 776
        <listitem>
         <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
777 778
          You ensure that the socket is in the appropriate state
          before calling <function>PQconnectPoll</function>, as described below.
779 780
         </para>
        </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
781 782
       </itemizedlist>
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
783

784 785 786 787 788
      <para>
       Note: use of <function>PQconnectStartParams</> is analogous to
       <function>PQconnectStart</> shown below.
      </para>

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796
      <para>
       To begin a nonblocking connection request, call <literal>conn = PQconnectStart("<replaceable>connection_info_string</>")</literal>.
       If <varname>conn</varname> is null, then <application>libpq</> has been unable to allocate a new <structname>PGconn</>
       structure. Otherwise, a valid <structname>PGconn</> pointer is returned (though not yet
       representing a valid connection to the database). On return from
       <function>PQconnectStart</function>, call <literal>status = PQstatus(conn)</literal>. If <varname>status</varname> equals
       <symbol>CONNECTION_BAD</symbol>, <function>PQconnectStart</function> has failed.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
797

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819
      <para>
       If <function>PQconnectStart</> succeeds, the next stage is to poll
       <application>libpq</> so that it can proceed with the connection sequence.
       Use <function>PQsocket(conn)</function> to obtain the descriptor of the
       socket underlying the database connection.
       Loop thus: If <function>PQconnectPoll(conn)</function> last returned
       <symbol>PGRES_POLLING_READING</symbol>, wait until the socket is ready to
       read (as indicated by <function>select()</>, <function>poll()</>, or
       similar system function).
       Then call <function>PQconnectPoll(conn)</function> again.
       Conversely, if <function>PQconnectPoll(conn)</function> last returned
       <symbol>PGRES_POLLING_WRITING</symbol>, wait until the socket is ready
       to write, then call <function>PQconnectPoll(conn)</function> again.
       If you have yet to call
       <function>PQconnectPoll</function>, i.e., just after the call to
       <function>PQconnectStart</function>, behave as if it last returned
       <symbol>PGRES_POLLING_WRITING</symbol>.  Continue this loop until
       <function>PQconnectPoll(conn)</function> returns
       <symbol>PGRES_POLLING_FAILED</symbol>, indicating the connection procedure
       has failed, or <symbol>PGRES_POLLING_OK</symbol>, indicating the connection
       has been successfully made.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
820

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
821 822
      <para>
       At any time during connection, the status of the connection can be
823 824
       checked by calling <function>PQstatus</>. If this call returns <symbol>CONNECTION_BAD</>, then the
       connection procedure has failed; if the call returns <function>CONNECTION_OK</>, then the
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
825 826 827 828 829
       connection is ready.  Both of these states are equally detectable
       from the return value of <function>PQconnectPoll</>, described above. Other states might also occur
       during (and only during) an asynchronous connection procedure. These
       indicate the current stage of the connection procedure and might be useful
       to provide feedback to the user for example. These statuses are:
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
830

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
831
       <variablelist>
832
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connection-started">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
833 834 835 836 837 838 839
         <term><symbol>CONNECTION_STARTED</symbol></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Waiting for connection to be made.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
840

841
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connection-made">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
842 843 844 845 846 847 848
         <term><symbol>CONNECTION_MADE</symbol></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Connection OK; waiting to send.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
849

850
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connection-awaiting-response">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
851 852 853 854 855 856 857
         <term><symbol>CONNECTION_AWAITING_RESPONSE</symbol></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Waiting for a response from the server.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
858

859
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connection-auth-ok">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
860 861 862 863 864 865 866
         <term><symbol>CONNECTION_AUTH_OK</symbol></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Received authentication; waiting for backend start-up to finish.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
867

868
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connection-ssl-startup">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
869 870 871 872 873 874 875
         <term><symbol>CONNECTION_SSL_STARTUP</symbol></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Negotiating SSL encryption.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
876

877
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connection-setenv">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885
         <term><symbol>CONNECTION_SETENV</symbol></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Negotiating environment-driven parameter settings.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
       </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
886

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
887 888 889 890
       Note that, although these constants will remain (in order to maintain
       compatibility), an application should never rely upon these occurring in a
       particular order, or at all, or on the status always being one of these
       documented values. An application might do something like this:
891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907
<programlisting>
switch(PQstatus(conn))
{
        case CONNECTION_STARTED:
            feedback = "Connecting...";
            break;

        case CONNECTION_MADE:
            feedback = "Connected to server...";
            break;
.
.
.
        default:
            feedback = "Connecting...";
}
</programlisting>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
908
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
909

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917
      <para>
       The <literal>connect_timeout</literal> connection parameter is ignored
       when using <function>PQconnectPoll</function>; it is the application's
       responsibility to decide whether an excessive amount of time has elapsed.
       Otherwise, <function>PQconnectStart</function> followed by a
       <function>PQconnectPoll</function> loop is equivalent to
       <function>PQconnectdb</function>.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
918

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926
      <para>
       Note that if <function>PQconnectStart</function> returns a non-null pointer, you must call
       <function>PQfinish</function> when you are finished with it, in order to dispose of
       the structure and any associated memory blocks. This must be done even if
       the connection attempt fails or is abandoned.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
927

928
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconndefaults">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
929 930 931 932
     <term><function>PQconndefaults</function><indexterm><primary>PQconndefaults</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the default connection options.
933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942
<synopsis>
PQconninfoOption *PQconndefaults(void);

typedef struct
{
    char   *keyword;   /* The keyword of the option */
    char   *envvar;    /* Fallback environment variable name */
    char   *compiled;  /* Fallback compiled in default value */
    char   *val;       /* Option's current value, or NULL */
    char   *label;     /* Label for field in connect dialog */
943
    char   *dispchar;  /* Indicates how to display this field
944 945 946 947 948 949 950
                          in a connect dialog. Values are:
                          ""        Display entered value as is
                          "*"       Password field - hide value
                          "D"       Debug option - don't show by default */
    int     dispsize;  /* Field size in characters for dialog */
} PQconninfoOption;
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
951
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
952

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963
      <para>
       Returns a connection options array.  This can be used to determine
       all possible <function>PQconnectdb</function> options and their
       current default values.  The return value points to an array of
       <structname>PQconninfoOption</structname> structures, which ends
       with an entry having a null <structfield>keyword</> pointer.  The
       null pointer is returned if memory could not be allocated. Note that
       the current default values (<structfield>val</structfield> fields)
       will depend on environment variables and other context.  Callers
       must treat the connection options data as read-only.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
964

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
965 966 967 968 969
      <para>
       After processing the options array, free it by passing it to
       <function>PQconninfoFree</function>.  If this is not done, a small amount of memory
       is leaked for each call to <function>PQconndefaults</function>.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
970

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
971 972
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
973

974
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconninfoparse">
975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986
     <term><function>PQconninfoParse</function><indexterm><primary>PQconninfoParse</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns parsed connection options from the provided connection string.

<synopsis>
PQconninfoOption *PQconninfoParse(const char *conninfo, char **errmsg);
</synopsis>
      </para>

      <para>
       Parses a connection string and returns the resulting options as an
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
987
       array; or returns <symbol>NULL</> if there is a problem with the connection
988
       string.  This function can be used to extract
989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000
       the <function>PQconnectdb</function> options in the provided
       connection string.  The return value points to an array of
       <structname>PQconninfoOption</structname> structures, which ends
       with an entry having a null <structfield>keyword</> pointer.
      </para>

      <para>
       Note that only options explicitly specified in the string will have
       values set in the result array; no defaults are inserted.
      </para>

      <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1001 1002
       If <literal>errmsg</> is not <symbol>NULL</>, then <literal>*errmsg</> is set
       to <symbol>NULL</> on success, else to a <function>malloc</>'d error string explaining
1003
       the problem.  (It is also possible for <literal>*errmsg</> to be
1004 1005
       set to <symbol>NULL</> and the function to return <symbol>NULL</>;
       this indicates an out-of-memory condition.)
1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011
      </para>

      <para>
       After processing the options array, free it by passing it to
       <function>PQconninfoFree</function>.  If this is not done, some memory
       is leaked for each call to <function>PQconninfoParse</function>.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1012
       Conversely, if an error occurs and <literal>errmsg</> is not <symbol>NULL</>,
1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018
       be sure to free the error string using <function>PQfreemem</>.
      </para>

   </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1019
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfinish">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1020 1021 1022 1023 1024
     <term><function>PQfinish</function><indexterm><primary>PQfinish</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Closes  the  connection to the server.  Also frees
       memory used by the <structname>PGconn</structname> object.
1025 1026 1027
<synopsis>
void PQfinish(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1028
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1029

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038
      <para>
       Note that even if the server connection attempt fails (as
       indicated by <function>PQstatus</function>), the application should call <function>PQfinish</function>
       to free the memory used by the <structname>PGconn</structname> object.
       The <structname>PGconn</> pointer must not be used again after
       <function>PQfinish</function> has been called.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1039

1040
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqreset">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1041 1042 1043 1044
     <term><function>PQreset</function><indexterm><primary>PQreset</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Resets the communication channel to the server.
1045 1046 1047
<synopsis>
void PQreset(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1048
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1049

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055
      <para>
       This function will close the connection
       to the server and attempt to  reestablish  a  new
       connection to the same server, using all the same
       parameters previously used.  This might be useful for
       error recovery if a working connection is lost.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1056
      </para>
1057 1058 1059
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1060
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqresetstart">
1061 1062
     <term><function>PQresetStart</function><indexterm><primary>PQresetStart</></></term>
     <term><function>PQresetPoll</function><indexterm><primary>PQresetPoll</></></term>
1063
     <listitem>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1064
      <para>
1065 1066
       Reset the communication channel to the server, in a nonblocking manner.

1067 1068 1069 1070 1071
<synopsis>
int PQresetStart(PGconn *conn);

PostgresPollingStatusType PQresetPoll(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1072 1073 1074
      </para>

      <para>
1075 1076 1077 1078 1079
       These functions will close the connection to the server and attempt to
       reestablish a new connection to the same server, using all the same
       parameters previously used. This can be useful for error recovery if a
       working connection is lost. They differ from <function>PQreset</function> (above) in that they
       act in a nonblocking manner. These functions suffer from the same
1080 1081
       restrictions as <function>PQconnectStartParams</>, <function>PQconnectStart</>
       and <function>PQconnectPoll</>.
B
 
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1082 1083
      </para>

1084
      <para>
1085 1086 1087 1088 1089
       To initiate a connection reset, call
       <function>PQresetStart</function>. If it returns 0, the reset has
       failed. If it returns 1, poll the reset using
       <function>PQresetPoll</function> in exactly the same way as you
       would create the connection using <function>PQconnectPoll</function>.
1090 1091 1092 1093
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqpingparams">
     <term><function>PQpingParams</function><indexterm><primary>PQpingParams</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       <function>PQpingParams</function> reports the status of the
       server.  It accepts connection parameters identical to those of
       <function>PQconnectdbParams</>, described above.  It is not, however,
       necessary to supply correct user name, password, or database name
       values to obtain the server status.

<synopsis>
PGPing PQpingParams(const char **keywords, const char **values, int expand_dbname);
</synopsis>

       The function returns one of the following values:

       <variablelist>
        <varlistentry id="libpq-pqpingparams-pqping-ok">
         <term><literal>PQPING_OK</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           The server is running and appears to be accepting connections.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

        <varlistentry id="libpq-pqpingparams-pqping-reject">
         <term><literal>PQPING_REJECT</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           The server is running but is in a state that disallows connections
           (startup, shutdown, or crash recovery).
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

        <varlistentry id="libpq-pqpingparams-pqping-no-response">
         <term><literal>PQPING_NO_RESPONSE</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
1134 1135 1136 1137 1138
           The server could not be contacted.  This might indicate that the
           server is not running, or that there is something wrong with the
           given connection parameters (for example, wrong port number), or
           that there is a network connectivity problem (for example, a
           firewall blocking the connection request).
1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

        <varlistentry id="libpq-pqpingparams-pqping-no-attempt">
         <term><literal>PQPING_NO_ATTEMPT</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           No attempt was made to contact the server, because the supplied
1148 1149
           parameters were obviously incorrect or there was some client-side
           problem (for example, out of memory).
1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
       </variablelist>

      </para>

     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqping">
     <term><function>PQping</function><indexterm><primary>PQping</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       <function>PQping</function> reports the status of the
       server.  It accepts connection parameters identical to those of
       <function>PQconnectdb</>, described above.  It is not, however,
       necessary to supply correct user name, password, or database name
       values to obtain the server status.

<synopsis>
PGPing PQping(const char *conninfo);
</synopsis>
      </para>

      <para>
       The return values are the same as for <function>PQpingParams</>.
      </para>

     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1182
   </variablelist>
1183 1184
  </para>
 </sect1>
1185

1186 1187
 <sect1 id="libpq-status">
  <title>Connection Status Functions</title>
1188

1189 1190 1191 1192
  <para>
   These functions can be used to interrogate the status
   of an existing database connection object.
  </para>
T
Tom Lane 已提交
1193

1194
  <tip>
1195
   <para>
1196 1197 1198 1199 1200
    <indexterm><primary>libpq-fe.h</></>
    <indexterm><primary>libpq-int.h</></>
    <application>libpq</application> application programmers should be careful to
    maintain the <structname>PGconn</structname> abstraction.  Use the accessor
    functions described below to get at the contents of <structname>PGconn</structname>.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1201
    Reference to internal <structname>PGconn</structname> fields using
1202 1203
    <filename>libpq-int.h</> is not recommended because they are subject to change
    in the future.
1204
   </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1205
  </tip>
1206

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1207 1208 1209
  <para>
   The following functions return parameter values established at connection.
   These values are fixed for the life of the <structname>PGconn</> object.
1210

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1211
   <variablelist>
1212
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqdb">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218
     <term>
      <function>PQdb</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQdb</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1219

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1220 1221 1222
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the database name of the connection.
1223 1224 1225
<synopsis>
char *PQdb(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1226 1227 1228
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
1229

1230
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pquser">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236
     <term>
      <function>PQuser</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQuser</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1237

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1238 1239 1240
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the user name of the connection.
1241 1242 1243
<synopsis>
char *PQuser(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1244 1245 1246
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
1247

1248
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqpass">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254
     <term>
      <function>PQpass</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQpass</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1255

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1256 1257 1258
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the password of the connection.
1259 1260 1261
<synopsis>
char *PQpass(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1262 1263 1264
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
1265

1266
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqhost">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272
     <term>
      <function>PQhost</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQhost</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1273

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1274 1275 1276
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the server host name of the connection.
1277 1278 1279
<synopsis>
char *PQhost(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1280 1281 1282 1283
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1284
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqport">
1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290
     <term>
      <function>PQport</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQport</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1291

1292 1293 1294
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the port of the connection.
1295

1296 1297 1298
<synopsis>
char *PQport(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1299 1300 1301
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
1302

1303
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqtty">
1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309
     <term>
      <function>PQtty</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQtty</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1310

1311 1312 1313 1314 1315
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the debug <acronym>TTY</acronym> of the connection.
       (This is obsolete, since the server no longer pays attention
       to the <acronym>TTY</acronym> setting, but the function remains
1316
       for backward compatibility.)
1317

1318 1319 1320
<synopsis>
char *PQtty(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1321 1322 1323 1324
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1325
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqoptions">
1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335
     <term>
      <function>PQoptions</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQoptions</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the command-line options passed in the connection request.
1336 1337 1338
<synopsis>
char *PQoptions(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1339 1340 1341 1342
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
1343
  </para>
1344

1345
  <para>
1346 1347
   The following functions return status data that can change as operations
   are executed on the <structname>PGconn</> object.
1348

1349
   <variablelist>
1350
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqstatus">
1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356
     <term>
      <function>PQstatus</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQstatus</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
1357

1358 1359
     <listitem>
      <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1360
       Returns the status of the connection.
1361 1362 1363
<synopsis>
ConnStatusType PQstatus(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1364
      </para>
1365

1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379
      <para>
       The status can be one of a number of values.  However, only two of
       these are seen outside of an asynchronous connection procedure:
       <literal>CONNECTION_OK</literal> and
       <literal>CONNECTION_BAD</literal>. A good connection to the database
       has the status <literal>CONNECTION_OK</literal>.  A failed
       connection attempt is signaled by status
       <literal>CONNECTION_BAD</literal>.  Ordinarily, an OK status will
       remain so until <function>PQfinish</function>, but a communications
       failure might result in the status changing to
       <literal>CONNECTION_BAD</literal> prematurely.  In that case the
       application could try to recover by calling
       <function>PQreset</function>.
      </para>
1380

1381
      <para>
1382 1383
       See the entry for <function>PQconnectStartParams</>, <function>PQconnectStart</>
       and <function>PQconnectPoll</> with regards to other status codes that
1384
       might be returned.
1385 1386 1387
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
1388

1389
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqtransactionstatus">
1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395
     <term>
      <function>PQtransactionStatus</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQtransactionStatus</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1396

1397 1398 1399 1400
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the current in-transaction status of the server.

1401 1402 1403
<synopsis>
PGTransactionStatusType PQtransactionStatus(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412

       The status can be <literal>PQTRANS_IDLE</literal> (currently idle),
       <literal>PQTRANS_ACTIVE</literal> (a command is in progress),
       <literal>PQTRANS_INTRANS</literal> (idle, in a valid transaction block),
       or <literal>PQTRANS_INERROR</literal> (idle, in a failed transaction block).
       <literal>PQTRANS_UNKNOWN</literal> is reported if the connection is bad.
       <literal>PQTRANS_ACTIVE</literal> is reported only when a query
       has been sent to the server and not yet completed.
      </para>
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
1413

1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421
      <caution>
       <para>
        <function>PQtransactionStatus</> will give incorrect results when using
        a <productname>PostgreSQL</> 7.3 server that has the parameter <literal>autocommit</>
        set to off.  The server-side autocommit feature has been
        deprecated and does not exist in later server versions.
       </para>
      </caution>
1422 1423
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
1424

1425
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqparameterstatus">
1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431
     <term>
      <function>PQparameterStatus</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQparameterStatus</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1432

1433 1434 1435
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Looks up a current parameter setting of the server.
T
Tom Lane 已提交
1436

1437 1438 1439
<synopsis>
const char *PQparameterStatus(const PGconn *conn, const char *paramName);
</synopsis>
1440

1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446
       Certain parameter values are reported by the server automatically at
       connection startup or whenever their values change.
       <function>PQparameterStatus</> can be used to interrogate these settings.
       It returns the current value of a parameter if known, or <symbol>NULL</symbol>
       if the parameter is not known.
      </para>
1447 1448

      <para>
1449
       Parameters reported as of the current release include
1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463
       <varname>server_version</>,
       <varname>server_encoding</>,
       <varname>client_encoding</>,
       <varname>application_name</>,
       <varname>is_superuser</>,
       <varname>session_authorization</>,
       <varname>DateStyle</>,
       <varname>IntervalStyle</>,
       <varname>TimeZone</>,
       <varname>integer_datetimes</>, and
       <varname>standard_conforming_strings</>.
       (<varname>server_encoding</>, <varname>TimeZone</>, and
       <varname>integer_datetimes</> were not reported by releases before 8.0;
       <varname>standard_conforming_strings</> was not reported by releases
1464
       before 8.1;
1465 1466
       <varname>IntervalStyle</> was not reported by releases before 8.4;
       <varname>application_name</> was not reported by releases before 9.0.)
1467
       Note that
1468 1469 1470
       <varname>server_version</>,
       <varname>server_encoding</> and
       <varname>integer_datetimes</>
1471
       cannot change after startup.
1472 1473 1474
      </para>

      <para>
1475 1476
       Pre-3.0-protocol servers do not report parameter settings, but
       <application>libpq</> includes logic to obtain values for
1477
       <varname>server_version</> and <varname>client_encoding</> anyway.
1478 1479 1480
       Applications are encouraged to use <function>PQparameterStatus</>
       rather than <foreignphrase>ad hoc</> code to determine these values.
       (Beware however that on a pre-3.0 connection, changing
1481
       <varname>client_encoding</> via <command>SET</> after connection
1482
       startup will not be reflected by <function>PQparameterStatus</>.)
1483
       For <varname>server_version</>, see also
1484 1485 1486 1487 1488
       <function>PQserverVersion</>, which returns the information in a
       numeric form that is much easier to compare against.
      </para>

      <para>
1489
       If no value for <varname>standard_conforming_strings</> is reported,
1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499
       applications can assume it is <literal>off</>, that is, backslashes
       are treated as escapes in string literals.  Also, the presence of
       this parameter can be taken as an indication that the escape string
       syntax (<literal>E'...'</>) is accepted.
      </para>

      <para>
       Although the returned pointer is declared <literal>const</>, it in fact
       points to mutable storage associated with the <literal>PGconn</> structure.
       It is unwise to assume the pointer will remain valid across queries.
1500 1501
      </para>
     </listitem>
1502
    </varlistentry>
1503

1504
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqprotocolversion">
1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510
     <term>
      <function>PQprotocolVersion</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQprotocolVersion</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1511

1512 1513 1514
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Interrogates the frontend/backend protocol being used.
1515 1516 1517
<synopsis>
int PQprotocolVersion(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1518
       Applications might wish to use this function to determine whether certain
1519
       features are supported.  Currently, the possible values are 2 (2.0
1520 1521
       protocol), 3 (3.0 protocol), or zero (connection bad).  The
       protocol version will
1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530
       not change after connection startup is complete, but it could
       theoretically change during a connection reset.  The 3.0 protocol
       will normally be used when communicating with
       <productname>PostgreSQL</> 7.4 or later servers; pre-7.4 servers
       support only protocol 2.0.  (Protocol 1.0 is obsolete and not
       supported by <application>libpq</application>.)
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
1531

1532
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqserverversion">
1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542
     <term>
      <function>PQserverVersion</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQserverVersion</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns an integer representing the backend version.
1543 1544 1545
<synopsis>
int PQserverVersion(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1546
       Applications might use this function to determine the version of the database
1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555
       server they are connected to. The number is formed by converting
       the major, minor, and revision numbers into two-decimal-digit
       numbers and appending them together. For example, version 8.1.5
       will be returned as 80105, and version 8.2 will be returned as
       80200 (leading zeroes are not shown).  Zero is returned if the
       connection is bad.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
1556

1557
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqerrormessage">
1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564
     <term>
      <function>PQerrorMessage</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQerrorMessage</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

1565 1566
     <listitem>
      <para>
1567 1568 1569
       <indexterm><primary>error message</></> Returns the error message
       most recently generated by an operation on the connection.

1570 1571 1572
<synopsis>
char *PQerrorMessage(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1573

1574 1575 1576
      </para>

      <para>
1577
       Nearly all <application>libpq</> functions will set a message for
1578 1579
       <function>PQerrorMessage</function> if they fail.  Note that by
       <application>libpq</application> convention, a nonempty
1580
       <function>PQerrorMessage</function> result can consist of multiple lines,
1581 1582 1583 1584
       and will include a trailing newline. The caller should not free
       the result directly. It will be freed when the associated
       <structname>PGconn</> handle is passed to
       <function>PQfinish</function>.  The result string should not be
1585
       expected to remain the same across operations on the
T
Tom Lane 已提交
1586
       <literal>PGconn</> structure.
1587 1588
      </para>
     </listitem>
1589
    </varlistentry>
1590

1591
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsocket">
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1592
     <term><function>PQsocket</function><indexterm><primary>PQsocket</></></term>
1593 1594
     <listitem>
      <para>
1595 1596 1597
       Obtains the file descriptor number of the connection socket to
       the server.  A valid descriptor will be greater than or equal
       to 0; a result of -1 indicates that no server connection is
1598 1599
       currently open.  (This will not change during normal operation,
       but could change during connection setup or reset.)
1600

1601 1602 1603
<synopsis>
int PQsocket(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1604

1605 1606 1607 1608
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1609
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqbackendpid">
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1610
     <term><function>PQbackendPID</function><indexterm><primary>PQbackendPID</></></term>
1611 1612
     <listitem>
      <para>
1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618
       Returns the process <acronym>ID</acronym> (PID)<indexterm>
        <primary>PID</>
        <secondary>determining PID of server process</>
        <tertiary>in libpq</>
       </indexterm>
       of the backend process handling this connection.
1619

1620 1621 1622
<synopsis>
int PQbackendPID(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1623 1624 1625
      </para>

      <para>
1626
       The backend <acronym>PID</acronym> is useful for debugging
1627 1628
       purposes and for comparison to <command>NOTIFY</command>
       messages (which include the <acronym>PID</acronym> of the
1629 1630 1631
       notifying backend process).  Note that the
       <acronym>PID</acronym> belongs to a process executing on the
       database server host, not the local host!
1632 1633
      </para>
     </listitem>
1634
    </varlistentry>
1635

1636
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconnectionneedspassword">
1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643
     <term><function>PQconnectionNeedsPassword</function><indexterm><primary>PQconnectionNeedsPassword</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns true (1) if the connection authentication method
       required a password, but none was available.
       Returns false (0) if not.

1644 1645 1646
<synopsis>
int PQconnectionNeedsPassword(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655
      </para>

      <para>
       This function can be applied after a failed connection attempt
       to decide whether to prompt the user for a password.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1656
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconnectionusedpassword">
1657 1658 1659 1660
     <term><function>PQconnectionUsedPassword</function><indexterm><primary>PQconnectionUsedPassword</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns true (1) if the connection authentication method
1661
       used a password. Returns false (0) if not.
1662

1663 1664 1665
<synopsis>
int PQconnectionUsedPassword(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1666 1667 1668
      </para>

      <para>
1669 1670
       This function can be applied after either a failed or successful
       connection attempt to detect whether the server demanded a password.
1671 1672 1673 1674
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1675
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetssl">
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1676
     <term><function>PQgetssl</function><indexterm><primary>PQgetssl</></></term>
1677 1678
     <listitem>
      <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1679
       <indexterm><primary>SSL</><secondary sortas="libpq">in libpq</secondary></indexterm>
1680
       Returns the SSL structure used in the connection, or null
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1681
       if SSL is not in use.
1682

1683 1684 1685
<synopsis>
SSL *PQgetssl(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691
      </para>

      <para>
       This structure can be used to verify encryption levels, check server
       certificates, and more. Refer to the <productname>OpenSSL</>
       documentation for information about this structure.
1692
      </para>
1693

1694
      <para>
1695
       You must define <symbol>USE_SSL</symbol> in order to get the
1696 1697 1698
       correct prototype for this function. Doing so will also
       automatically include <filename>ssl.h</filename> from
       <productname>OpenSSL</productname>.
1699 1700
      </para>
     </listitem>
1701
    </varlistentry>
1702

1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709
   </variablelist>
  </para>

 </sect1>

 <sect1 id="libpq-exec">
  <title>Command Execution Functions</title>
1710

1711 1712 1713 1714 1715
  <para>
   Once a connection to a database server has been successfully
   established, the functions described here are used to perform
   SQL queries and commands.
  </para>
1716

1717 1718
  <sect2 id="libpq-exec-main">
   <title>Main Functions</title>
1719

1720 1721
   <para>
    <variablelist>
1722
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqexec">
1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728
      <term>
       <function>PQexec</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQexec</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1729

1730 1731 1732 1733
      <listitem>
       <para>
        Submits a command to the server and waits for the result.

1734 1735 1736
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQexec(PGconn *conn, const char *command);
</synopsis>
1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751
       </para>

       <para>
        Returns a <structname>PGresult</structname> pointer or possibly a null
        pointer.  A non-null pointer will generally be returned except in
        out-of-memory conditions or serious errors such as inability to send
        the command to the server.  If a null pointer is returned, it should
        be treated like a <symbol>PGRES_FATAL_ERROR</symbol> result.  Use
        <function>PQerrorMessage</function> to get more information about such
        errors.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>
    </variablelist>

1752 1753
    The command string can include multiple SQL commands
    (separated by semicolons).  Multiple queries sent in a single
1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765
    <function>PQexec</> call are processed in a single transaction, unless
    there are explicit <command>BEGIN</command>/<command>COMMIT</command>
    commands included in the query string to divide it into multiple
    transactions.  Note however that the returned
    <structname>PGresult</structname> structure describes only the result
    of the last command executed from the string.  Should one of the
    commands fail, processing of the string stops with it and the returned
    <structname>PGresult</structname> describes the error condition.
   </para>

   <para>
    <variablelist>
1766
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqexecparams">
1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778
      <term>
       <function>PQexecParams</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQexecParams</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
        Submits a command to the server and waits for the result,
        with the ability to pass parameters separately from the SQL
        command text.
1779

1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQexecParams(PGconn *conn,
                       const char *command,
                       int nParams,
                       const Oid *paramTypes,
                       const char * const *paramValues,
                       const int *paramLengths,
                       const int *paramFormats,
                       int resultFormat);
</synopsis>
1790
       </para>
1791

1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798
       <para>
        <function>PQexecParams</> is like <function>PQexec</>, but offers additional
        functionality: parameter values can be specified separately from the command
        string proper, and query results can be requested in either text or binary
        format.  <function>PQexecParams</> is supported only in protocol 3.0 and later
        connections; it will fail when using protocol 2.0.
       </para>
1799

1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884
       <para>
        The function arguments are:

        <variablelist>
         <varlistentry>
          <term><parameter>conn</parameter></term>

          <listitem>
           <para>
            The connection object to send the command through.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

         <varlistentry>
          <term><parameter>command</parameter></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The SQL command string to be executed. If parameters are used,
            they are referred to in the command string as <literal>$1</>,
            <literal>$2</>, etc.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

         <varlistentry>
          <term><parameter>nParams</parameter></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The number of parameters supplied; it is the length of the arrays
            <parameter>paramTypes[]</>, <parameter>paramValues[]</>,
            <parameter>paramLengths[]</>, and <parameter>paramFormats[]</>. (The
            array pointers can be <symbol>NULL</symbol> when <parameter>nParams</>
            is zero.)
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

         <varlistentry>
          <term><parameter>paramTypes[]</parameter></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Specifies, by OID, the data types to be assigned to the
            parameter symbols.  If <parameter>paramTypes</> is
            <symbol>NULL</symbol>, or any particular element in the array
            is zero, the server infers a data type for the parameter symbol
            in the same way it would do for an untyped literal string.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

         <varlistentry>
          <term><parameter>paramValues[]</parameter></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Specifies the actual values of the parameters.  A null pointer
            in this array means the corresponding parameter is null;
            otherwise the pointer points to a zero-terminated text string
            (for text format) or binary data in the format expected by the
            server (for binary format).
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

         <varlistentry>
          <term><parameter>paramLengths[]</parameter></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Specifies the actual data lengths of binary-format parameters.
            It is ignored for null parameters and text-format parameters.
            The array pointer can be null when there are no binary parameters.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

         <varlistentry>
          <term><parameter>paramFormats[]</parameter></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Specifies whether parameters are text (put a zero in the
            array entry for the corresponding parameter) or binary (put
            a one in the array entry for the corresponding parameter).
            If the array pointer is null then all parameters are presumed
            to be text strings.
           </para>
1885
           <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1886
            Values passed in binary format require knowledge of
1887 1888 1889 1890
            the internal representation expected by the backend.
            For example, integers must be passed in network byte
            order.  Passing <type>numeric</> values requires
            knowledge of the server storage format, as implemented
1891 1892 1893
            in
            <filename>src/backend/utils/adt/numeric.c::numeric_send()</> and
            <filename>src/backend/utils/adt/numeric.c::numeric_recv()</>.
1894
           </para>
1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

         <varlistentry>
          <term><parameter>resultFormat</parameter></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Specify zero to obtain results in text format, or one to obtain
            results in binary format.  (There is not currently a provision
            to obtain different result columns in different formats,
            although that is possible in the underlying protocol.)
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
        </variablelist>
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>
    </variablelist>
   </para>
1915

1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921
   <para>
    The primary advantage of <function>PQexecParams</> over
    <function>PQexec</> is that parameter values can be separated from the
    command string, thus avoiding the need for tedious and error-prone
    quoting and escaping.
   </para>
1922

1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929
   <para>
    Unlike <function>PQexec</>, <function>PQexecParams</> allows at most
    one SQL command in the given string.  (There can be semicolons in it,
    but not more than one nonempty command.)  This is a limitation of the
    underlying protocol, but has some usefulness as an extra defense against
    SQL-injection attacks.
   </para>
1930

1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938
   <tip>
    <para>
     Specifying parameter types via OIDs is tedious, particularly if you prefer
     not to hard-wire particular OID values into your program.  However, you can
     avoid doing so even in cases where the server by itself cannot determine the
     type of the parameter, or chooses a different type than you want.  In the
     SQL command text, attach an explicit cast to the parameter symbol to show what
     data type you will send.  For example:
1939
<programlisting>
1940
SELECT * FROM mytable WHERE x = $1::bigint;
1941
</programlisting>
1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952
     This forces parameter <literal>$1</> to be treated as <type>bigint</>, whereas
     by default it would be assigned the same type as <literal>x</>.  Forcing the
     parameter type decision, either this way or by specifying a numeric type OID,
     is strongly recommended when sending parameter values in binary format, because
     binary format has less redundancy than text format and so there is less chance
     that the server will detect a type mismatch mistake for you.
    </para>
   </tip>

   <para>
    <variablelist>
1953
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqprepare">
1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963
      <term><function>PQprepare</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQprepare</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
        Submits a request to create a prepared statement with the
        given parameters, and waits for completion.
1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQprepare(PGconn *conn,
                    const char *stmtName,
                    const char *query,
                    int nParams,
                    const Oid *paramTypes);
</synopsis>
1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981
       </para>

       <para>
        <function>PQprepare</> creates a prepared statement for later
        execution with <function>PQexecPrepared</>.  This feature allows
        commands that will be used repeatedly to be parsed and planned just
        once, rather than each time they are executed.
        <function>PQprepare</> is supported only in protocol 3.0 and later
        connections; it will fail when using protocol 2.0.
       </para>

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
       <para>
        The function creates a prepared statement named
        <parameter>stmtName</> from the <parameter>query</> string, which
        must contain a single SQL command.  <parameter>stmtName</> can be
        <literal>""</> to create an unnamed statement, in which case any
        pre-existing unnamed statement is automatically replaced; otherwise
        it is an error if the statement name is already defined in the
        current session.  If any parameters are used, they are referred
        to in the query as <literal>$1</>, <literal>$2</>, etc.
        <parameter>nParams</> is the number of parameters for which types
        are pre-specified in the array <parameter>paramTypes[]</>.  (The
        array pointer can be <symbol>NULL</symbol> when
        <parameter>nParams</> is zero.) <parameter>paramTypes[]</>
        specifies, by OID, the data types to be assigned to the parameter
        symbols.  If <parameter>paramTypes</> is <symbol>NULL</symbol>,
        or any particular element in the array is zero, the server assigns
        a data type to the parameter symbol in the same way it would do
        for an untyped literal string.  Also, the query can use parameter
        symbols with numbers higher than <parameter>nParams</>; data types
        will be inferred for these symbols as well.  (See
        <function>PQdescribePrepared</function> for a means to find out
        what data types were inferred.)
       </para>
2005

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018
       <para>
        As with <function>PQexec</>, the result is normally a
        <structname>PGresult</structname> object whose contents indicate
        server-side success or failure.  A null result indicates
        out-of-memory or inability to send the command at all.  Use
        <function>PQerrorMessage</function> to get more information about
        such errors.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>
    </variablelist>

    Prepared statements for use with <function>PQexecPrepared</> can also
2019
    be created by executing SQL <xref linkend="sql-prepare">
2020
    statements.  Also, although there is no <application>libpq</>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2021
    function for deleting a prepared statement, the SQL <xref
2022
    linkend="sql-deallocate"> statement
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2023 2024 2025 2026 2027
    can be used for that purpose.
   </para>

   <para>
    <variablelist>
2028
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqexecprepared">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039
      <term>
       <function>PQexecPrepared</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQexecPrepared</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
        Sends a request to execute a prepared statement with given
        parameters, and waits for the result.
2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQexecPrepared(PGconn *conn,
                         const char *stmtName,
                         int nParams,
                         const char * const *paramValues,
                         const int *paramLengths,
                         const int *paramFormats,
                         int resultFormat);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2055 2056 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071
       </para>

       <para>
        <function>PQexecPrepared</> is like <function>PQexecParams</>,
        but the command to be executed is specified by naming a
        previously-prepared statement, instead of giving a query string.
        This feature allows commands that will be used repeatedly to be
        parsed and planned just once, rather than each time they are
        executed.  The statement must have been prepared previously in
        the current session.  <function>PQexecPrepared</> is supported
        only in protocol 3.0 and later connections; it will fail when
        using protocol 2.0.
       </para>

       <para>
        The parameters are identical to <function>PQexecParams</>, except that the
        name of a prepared statement is given instead of a query string, and the
        <parameter>paramTypes[]</> parameter is not present (it is not needed since
        the prepared statement's parameter types were determined when it was created).
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>

2072
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqdescribeprepared">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083
      <term>
       <function>PQdescribePrepared</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQdescribePrepared</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
        Submits a request to obtain information about the specified
        prepared statement, and waits for completion.
2084 2085 2086
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQdescribePrepared(PGconn *conn, const char *stmtName);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096
       </para>

       <para>
        <function>PQdescribePrepared</> allows an application to obtain
        information about a previously prepared statement.
        <function>PQdescribePrepared</> is supported only in protocol 3.0
        and later connections; it will fail when using protocol 2.0.
       </para>

       <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
2097
        <parameter>stmtName</> can be <literal>""</> or <symbol>NULL</> to reference
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111
        the unnamed statement, otherwise it must be the name of an existing
        prepared statement.  On success, a <structname>PGresult</> with
        status <literal>PGRES_COMMAND_OK</literal> is returned.  The
        functions <function>PQnparams</function> and
        <function>PQparamtype</function> can be applied to this
        <structname>PGresult</> to obtain information about the parameters
        of the prepared statement, and the functions
        <function>PQnfields</function>, <function>PQfname</function>,
        <function>PQftype</function>, etc provide information about the
        result columns (if any) of the statement.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>

2112
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqdescribeportal">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122 2123
      <term>
       <function>PQdescribePortal</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQdescribePortal</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
        Submits a request to obtain information about the specified
        portal, and waits for completion.
2124 2125 2126
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQdescribePortal(PGconn *conn, const char *portalName);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2127
       </para>
2128

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139
       <para>
        <function>PQdescribePortal</> allows an application to obtain
        information about a previously created portal.
        (<application>libpq</> does not provide any direct access to
        portals, but you can use this function to inspect the properties
        of a cursor created with a <command>DECLARE CURSOR</> SQL command.)
        <function>PQdescribePortal</> is supported only in protocol 3.0
        and later connections; it will fail when using protocol 2.0.
       </para>

       <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
2140
        <parameter>portalName</> can be <literal>""</> or <symbol>NULL</> to reference
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164
        the unnamed portal, otherwise it must be the name of an existing
        portal.  On success, a <structname>PGresult</> with status
        <literal>PGRES_COMMAND_OK</literal> is returned.  The functions
        <function>PQnfields</function>, <function>PQfname</function>,
        <function>PQftype</function>, etc can be applied to the
        <structname>PGresult</> to obtain information about the result
        columns (if any) of the portal.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>
    </variablelist>
   </para>

   <para>
    The <structname>PGresult</structname><indexterm><primary>PGresult</></>
    structure encapsulates the result returned by the server.
    <application>libpq</application> application programmers should be
    careful to maintain the <structname>PGresult</structname> abstraction.
    Use the accessor functions below to get at the contents of
    <structname>PGresult</structname>.  Avoid directly referencing the
    fields of the <structname>PGresult</structname> structure because they
    are subject to change in the future.

    <variablelist>
2165
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqresultstatus">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175
      <term>
       <function>PQresultStatus</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQresultStatus</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
        Returns the result status of the command.
2176 2177 2178
<synopsis>
ExecStatusType PQresultStatus(const PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2179 2180 2181 2182 2183 2184
       </para>

       <para>
        <function>PQresultStatus</function> can return one of the following values:

        <variablelist>
2185
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-empty-query">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 2193
          <term><literal>PGRES_EMPTY_QUERY</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The string sent to the server was empty.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2194
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-command-ok">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202
          <term><literal>PGRES_COMMAND_OK</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Successful completion of a command returning no data.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2203
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-tuples-ok">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212
          <term><literal>PGRES_TUPLES_OK</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Successful completion of a command returning data (such as
            a <command>SELECT</> or <command>SHOW</>).
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2213
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-copy-out">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2214 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221
          <term><literal>PGRES_COPY_OUT</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Copy Out (from server) data transfer started.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2222
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-copy-in">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 2230
          <term><literal>PGRES_COPY_IN</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Copy In (to server) data transfer started.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2231
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-bad-response">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2232 2233 2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239
          <term><literal>PGRES_BAD_RESPONSE</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The server's response was not understood.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2240
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-nonfatal-error">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248
          <term><literal>PGRES_NONFATAL_ERROR</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            A nonfatal error (a notice or warning) occurred.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2249
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-fatal-error">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2250 2251 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256
          <term><literal>PGRES_FATAL_ERROR</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            A fatal error occurred.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266

         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-copy-both">
          <term><literal>PGRES_COPY_BOTH</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Copy In/Out (to and from server) data transfer started.  This is
            currently used only for streaming replication.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289
        </variablelist>

        If the result status is <literal>PGRES_TUPLES_OK</literal>, then
        the functions described below can be used to retrieve the rows
        returned by the query.  Note that a <command>SELECT</command>
        command that happens to retrieve zero rows still shows
        <literal>PGRES_TUPLES_OK</literal>.
        <literal>PGRES_COMMAND_OK</literal> is for commands that can never
        return rows (<command>INSERT</command>, <command>UPDATE</command>,
        etc.). A response of <literal>PGRES_EMPTY_QUERY</literal> might
        indicate a bug in the client software.
       </para>

       <para>
        A result of status <symbol>PGRES_NONFATAL_ERROR</symbol> will
        never be returned directly by <function>PQexec</function> or other
        query execution functions; results of this kind are instead passed
        to the notice processor (see <xref
        linkend="libpq-notice-processing">).
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>

2290
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqresstatus">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303
      <term>
       <function>PQresStatus</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQresStatus</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
        Converts the enumerated type returned by
        <function>PQresultStatus</> into a string constant describing the
        status code. The caller should not free the result.

2304 2305 2306
<synopsis>
char *PQresStatus(ExecStatusType status);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2307 2308 2309 2310
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>

2311
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqresulterrormessage">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2312 2313 2314 2315 2316 2317 2318 2319 2320 2321 2322
      <term>
       <function>PQresultErrorMessage</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQresultErrorMessage</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
        Returns the error message associated with the command, or an empty string
        if there was no error.
2323 2324 2325
<synopsis>
char *PQresultErrorMessage(const PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348
        If there was an error, the returned string will include a trailing
        newline.  The caller should not free the result directly. It will
        be freed when the associated <structname>PGresult</> handle is
        passed to <function>PQclear</function>.
       </para>

       <para>
        Immediately following a <function>PQexec</function> or
        <function>PQgetResult</function> call,
        <function>PQerrorMessage</function> (on the connection) will return
        the same string as <function>PQresultErrorMessage</function> (on
        the result).  However, a <structname>PGresult</structname> will
        retain its error message until destroyed, whereas the connection's
        error message will change when subsequent operations are done.
        Use <function>PQresultErrorMessage</function> when you want to
        know the status associated with a particular
        <structname>PGresult</structname>; use
        <function>PQerrorMessage</function> when you want to know the
        status from the latest operation on the connection.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>

2349
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqresulterrorfield">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2350 2351 2352 2353
      <term><function>PQresultErrorField</function><indexterm><primary>PQresultErrorField</></></term>
      <listitem>
       <para>
        Returns an individual field of an error report.
2354 2355 2356
<synopsis>
char *PQresultErrorField(const PGresult *res, int fieldcode);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369
        <parameter>fieldcode</> is an error field identifier; see the symbols
        listed below.  <symbol>NULL</symbol> is returned if the
        <structname>PGresult</structname> is not an error or warning result,
        or does not include the specified field.  Field values will normally
        not include a trailing newline. The caller should not free the
        result directly. It will be freed when the
        associated <structname>PGresult</> handle is passed to
        <function>PQclear</function>.
       </para>

       <para>
        The following field codes are available:
        <variablelist>
2370
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-severity">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 2378 2379 2380 2381 2382
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_SEVERITY</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The severity; the field contents are <literal>ERROR</>,
            <literal>FATAL</>, or <literal>PANIC</> (in an error message),
            or <literal>WARNING</>, <literal>NOTICE</>, <literal>DEBUG</>,
            <literal>INFO</>, or <literal>LOG</> (in a notice message), or
            a localized translation of one of these.  Always present.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2383
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-sqlstate">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2384 2385 2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 2395 2396 2397 2398 2399 2400 2401
          <indexterm>
           <primary>error codes</primary>
           <secondary>libpq</secondary>
          </indexterm>
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_SQLSTATE</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The SQLSTATE code for the error. The SQLSTATE code identifies
            the type of error that has occurred; it can be used by
            front-end applications to perform specific operations (such
            as error handling) in response to a particular database error.
            For a list of the possible SQLSTATE codes, see <xref
            linkend="errcodes-appendix">. This field is not localizable,
            and is always present.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2402
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-message-primary">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_MESSAGE_PRIMARY</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The primary human-readable error message (typically one line).
            Always present.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2412
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-message-detail">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 2419 2420 2421
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_MESSAGE_DETAIL</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Detail: an optional secondary error message carrying more
            detail about the problem.  Might run to multiple lines.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2422
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-message-hint">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2423 2424 2425 2426 2427 2428 2429 2430 2431 2432 2433
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_MESSAGE_HINT</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Hint: an optional suggestion what to do about the problem.
            This is intended to differ from detail in that it offers advice
            (potentially inappropriate) rather than hard facts.  Might
            run to multiple lines.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2434
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-statement-position">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2435 2436
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_STATEMENT_POSITION</></term>
          <listitem>
2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444
           <para>
            A string containing a decimal integer indicating an error cursor
            position as an index into the original statement string.  The
            first character has index 1, and positions are measured in
            characters not bytes.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2445

2446
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-internal-position">
2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_INTERNAL_POSITION</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            This is defined the same as the
            <symbol>PG_DIAG_STATEMENT_POSITION</> field, but it is used
            when the cursor position refers to an internally generated
            command rather than the one submitted by the client.  The
            <symbol>PG_DIAG_INTERNAL_QUERY</> field will always appear when
            this field appears.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2459

2460
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-internal-query">
2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_INTERNAL_QUERY</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The text of a failed internally-generated command.  This could
            be, for example, a SQL query issued by a PL/pgSQL function.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2469

2470
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-context">
2471 2472 2473 2474 2475 2476 2477 2478 2479 2480
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_CONTEXT</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            An indication of the context in which the error occurred.
            Presently this includes a call stack traceback of active
            procedural language functions and internally-generated queries.
            The trace is one entry per line, most recent first.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2481

2482
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-source-file">
2483 2484 2485 2486 2487 2488 2489 2490
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_SOURCE_FILE</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The file name of the source-code location where the error was
            reported.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2491

2492
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-source-line">
2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2498 2499 2500
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_SOURCE_LINE</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The line number of the source-code location where the error
            was reported.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2501

2502
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-source-function">
2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_SOURCE_FUNCTION</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The name of the source-code function reporting the error.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
        </variablelist>
       </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2512

2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518
       <para>
        The client is responsible for formatting displayed information to meet
        its needs; in particular it should break long lines as needed.
        Newline characters appearing in the error message fields should be
        treated as paragraph breaks, not line breaks.
       </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2519

2520 2521 2522 2523 2524 2525
       <para>
        Errors generated internally by <application>libpq</application> will
        have severity and primary message, but typically no other fields.
        Errors returned by a pre-3.0-protocol server will include severity and
        primary message, and sometimes a detail message, but no other fields.
       </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2526

2527 2528 2529 2530 2531 2532 2533 2534
       <para>
        Note that error fields are only available from
        <structname>PGresult</structname> objects, not
        <structname>PGconn</structname> objects; there is no
        <function>PQerrorField</function> function.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2535

2536
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqclear">
2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542 2543 2544
      <term><function>PQclear</function><indexterm><primary>PQclear</></></term>
      <listitem>
       <para>
        Frees  the  storage  associated with a
        <structname>PGresult</structname>.  Every command result should be
        freed via <function>PQclear</function> when it  is  no  longer
        needed.

2545 2546 2547
<synopsis>
void PQclear(PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
2548
       </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2549

2550 2551 2552 2553 2554 2555 2556 2557 2558 2559 2560 2561
       <para>
        You can keep a <structname>PGresult</structname> object around for
        as long as you need it; it does not go away when you issue a new
        command, nor even if you close the connection.  To get rid of it,
        you must call <function>PQclear</function>.  Failure to do this
        will result in memory leaks in your application.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>
    </variablelist>
   </para>
  </sect2>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2562

2563 2564
  <sect2 id="libpq-exec-select-info">
   <title>Retrieving Query Result Information</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2565

2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 2572 2573 2574 2575
   <para>
    These functions are used to extract information from a
    <structname>PGresult</structname> object that represents a successful
    query result (that is, one that has status
    <literal>PGRES_TUPLES_OK</literal>).  They can also be used to extract
    information from a successful Describe operation: a Describe's result
    has all the same column information that actual execution of the query
    would provide, but it has zero rows.  For objects with other status values,
    these functions will act as though the result has zero rows and zero columns.
   </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2576

2577
   <variablelist>
2578
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqntuples">
2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584
     <term>
      <function>PQntuples</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQntuples</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
2585

2586 2587
     <listitem>
      <para>
2588 2589 2590
       Returns the number of rows (tuples) in the query result.  Because
       it returns an integer result, large result sets might overflow the
       return value on 32-bit operating systems.
2591

2592 2593 2594
<synopsis>
int PQntuples(const PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
2595

2596 2597 2598
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2599

2600
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqnfields">
2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606
     <term>
      <function>PQnfields</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQnfields</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
2607

2608 2609 2610 2611
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the number of columns (fields) in each row of the query
       result.
2612

2613 2614 2615
<synopsis>
int PQnfields(const PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
2616 2617 2618
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2619

2620
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfname">
2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2626
     <term>
      <function>PQfname</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQfname</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
2627

2628 2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the column name associated with the given column number.
       Column numbers start at 0. The caller should not free the result
       directly. It will be freed when the associated
       <structname>PGresult</> handle is passed to
       <function>PQclear</function>.
2635 2636 2637 2638
<synopsis>
char *PQfname(const PGresult *res,
              int column_number);
</synopsis>
2639
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2640

2641 2642 2643 2644 2645
      <para>
       <symbol>NULL</symbol> is returned if the column number is out of range.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2646

2647
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfnumber">
2648 2649 2650 2651 2652 2653
     <term>
      <function>PQfnumber</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQfnumber</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
2654

2655 2656 2657
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the column number associated with the given column name.
2658 2659 2660 2661
<synopsis>
int PQfnumber(const PGresult *res,
              const char *column_name);
</synopsis>
2662
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2663

2664 2665 2666
      <para>
       -1 is returned if the given name does not match any column.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2667

2668 2669 2670 2671
      <para>
       The given name is treated like an identifier in an SQL command,
       that is, it is downcased unless double-quoted.  For example, given
       a query result generated from the SQL command:
2672
<programlisting>
2673
SELECT 1 AS FOO, 2 AS "BAR";
2674
</programlisting>
2675
       we would have the results:
2676 2677 2678 2679 2680 2681 2682 2683
<programlisting>
PQfname(res, 0)              <lineannotation>foo</lineannotation>
PQfname(res, 1)              <lineannotation>BAR</lineannotation>
PQfnumber(res, "FOO")        <lineannotation>0</lineannotation>
PQfnumber(res, "foo")        <lineannotation>0</lineannotation>
PQfnumber(res, "BAR")        <lineannotation>-1</lineannotation>
PQfnumber(res, "\"BAR\"")    <lineannotation>1</lineannotation>
</programlisting>
2684 2685 2686
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2687

2688
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqftable">
2689 2690 2691 2692 2693 2694
     <term>
      <function>PQftable</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQftable</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
2695

2696 2697 2698 2699
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the OID of the table from which the given column was
       fetched.  Column numbers start at 0.
2700 2701 2702 2703
<synopsis>
Oid PQftable(const PGresult *res,
             int column_number);
</synopsis>
2704
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2705

2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712
      <para>
       <literal>InvalidOid</> is returned if the column number is out of range,
       or if the specified column is not a simple reference to a table column,
       or when using pre-3.0 protocol.
       You can query the system table <literal>pg_class</literal> to determine
       exactly which table is referenced.
      </para>
T
Tom Lane 已提交
2713

2714 2715 2716 2717 2718 2719 2720 2721
      <para>
       The type <type>Oid</type> and the constant
       <literal>InvalidOid</literal> will be defined when you include
       the <application>libpq</application> header file. They will both
       be some integer type.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2722

2723
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqftablecol">
2724 2725 2726 2727 2728 2729
     <term>
      <function>PQftablecol</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQftablecol</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
2730

2731 2732 2733 2734 2735
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the column number (within its table) of the column making
       up the specified query result column.  Query-result column numbers
       start at 0, but table columns have nonzero numbers.
2736 2737 2738 2739
<synopsis>
int PQftablecol(const PGresult *res,
                int column_number);
</synopsis>
2740
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2741

2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 2747 2748
      <para>
       Zero is returned if the column number is out of range, or if the
       specified column is not a simple reference to a table column, or
       when using pre-3.0 protocol.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
2749

2750
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfformat">
2751 2752 2753 2754 2755 2756
     <term>
      <function>PQfformat</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQfformat</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
2757

2758 2759 2760 2761
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the format code indicating the format of the given
       column.  Column numbers start at 0.
2762 2763 2764 2765
<synopsis>
int PQfformat(const PGresult *res,
              int column_number);
</synopsis>
2766
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2767

2768 2769 2770 2771 2772 2773 2774
      <para>
       Format code zero indicates textual data representation, while format
       code one indicates binary representation.  (Other codes are reserved
       for future definition.)
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2775

2776
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqftype">
2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782
     <term>
      <function>PQftype</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQftype</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
2783

2784 2785 2786 2787 2788
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the data type associated with the given  column number.
       The  integer  returned is the internal OID number of the type.
       Column numbers start at 0.
2789 2790 2791 2792
<synopsis>
Oid PQftype(const PGresult *res,
            int column_number);
</synopsis>
2793
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2794

2795 2796 2797 2798 2799 2800 2801 2802 2803
      <para>
       You can query the system table <literal>pg_type</literal> to
       obtain the names and properties of the various data types. The
       <acronym>OID</acronym>s of the built-in data types are defined
       in the file <filename>src/include/catalog/pg_type.h</filename>
       in the source tree.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2804

2805
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfmod">
2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816
     <term>
      <function>PQfmod</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQfmod</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns  the type modifier of the column associated with the
       given column number.  Column numbers start at 0.
2817 2818 2819 2820
<synopsis>
int PQfmod(const PGresult *res,
           int column_number);
</synopsis>
2821
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2822

2823 2824 2825 2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831
      <para>
       The interpretation of modifier values is type-specific; they
       typically indicate precision or size limits.  The value -1 is
       used to indicate <quote>no information available</>.  Most data
       types do not use modifiers, in which case the value is always
       -1.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2832

2833
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfsize">
2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844
     <term>
      <function>PQfsize</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQfsize</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns  the  size  in bytes of the column associated with the
       given column number.  Column numbers start at 0.
2845 2846 2847 2848
<synopsis>
int PQfsize(const PGresult *res,
            int column_number);
</synopsis>
2849
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2850

2851 2852 2853 2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859
      <para>
       <function>PQfsize</> returns the space allocated for this column
       in a database row, in other words the size of the server's
       internal representation of the data type.  (Accordingly, it is
       not really very useful to clients.) A negative value indicates
       the data type is variable-length.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2860

2861
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqbinarytuples">
2862 2863 2864 2865 2866 2867 2868 2869
     <term>
      <function>PQbinaryTuples</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQbinaryTuples</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2870 2871 2872
      <para>
       Returns 1 if the <structname>PGresult</> contains binary data
       and 0 if it contains text data.
2873 2874 2875
<synopsis>
int PQbinaryTuples(const PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2876
      </para>
2877

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887
      <para>
       This function is deprecated (except for its use in connection with
       <command>COPY</>), because it is possible for a single
       <structname>PGresult</> to contain text data in some columns and
       binary data in others.  <function>PQfformat</> is preferred.
       <function>PQbinaryTuples</> returns 1 only if all columns of the
       result are binary (format 1).
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2888

2889
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetvalue">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895
     <term>
      <function>PQgetvalue</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQgetvalue</primary>
       </indexterm>
     </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2896

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns a single field value of one row of a
       <structname>PGresult</structname>.  Row and column numbers start
       at 0.  The caller should not free the result directly.  It will
       be freed when the associated <structname>PGresult</> handle is
       passed to <function>PQclear</function>.
2904 2905 2906 2907 2908
<synopsis>
char *PQgetvalue(const PGresult *res,
                 int row_number,
                 int column_number);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2909
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2910

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 2918 2919 2920
      <para>
       For data in text format, the value returned by
       <function>PQgetvalue</function> is a null-terminated character
       string  representation of the field value.  For data in binary
       format, the value is in the binary representation determined by
       the data type's <function>typsend</> and <function>typreceive</>
       functions.  (The value is actually followed by a zero byte in
       this case too, but that is not ordinarily useful, since the
       value is likely to contain embedded nulls.)
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2921

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2922 2923 2924 2925 2926
      <para>
       An empty string is returned if the field value is null.  See
       <function>PQgetisnull</> to distinguish null values from
       empty-string values.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2927

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2928 2929 2930 2931 2932 2933 2934 2935 2936 2937
      <para>
       The pointer returned  by  <function>PQgetvalue</function> points
       to storage that is part of the <structname>PGresult</structname>
       structure.  One should not modify the data it points to, and one
       must explicitly copy the data into other storage if it is to be
       used past the lifetime of the  <structname>PGresult</structname>
       structure itself.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2938

2939
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetisnull">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2940 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 2946 2947 2948 2949
     <term>
      <function>PQgetisnull</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQgetisnull</primary>
      </indexterm>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>null value</primary>
       <secondary sortas="libpq">in libpq</secondary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2950

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2951 2952 2953 2954
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Tests a field for a null value.  Row and column numbers start
       at 0.
2955 2956 2957 2958 2959
<synopsis>
int PQgetisnull(const PGresult *res,
                int row_number,
                int column_number);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2960
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2961

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2962 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969
      <para>
       This function returns  1 if the field is null and 0 if it
       contains a non-null value.  (Note that
       <function>PQgetvalue</function> will return an empty string,
       not a null pointer, for a null field.)
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2970

2971
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetlength">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2972 2973 2974 2975 2976
     <term>
     <function>PQgetlength</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQgetlength</primary>
     </indexterm></term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2977

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2978 2979 2980 2981
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the actual length of a field value in bytes.  Row and
       column numbers start at 0.
2982 2983 2984 2985 2986
<synopsis>
int PQgetlength(const PGresult *res,
                int row_number,
                int column_number);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2987
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2988

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 2999
      <para>
       This is the actual data length for the particular data value,
       that is, the size of the object pointed to by
       <function>PQgetvalue</function>.  For text data format this is
       the same as <function>strlen()</>.  For binary format this is
       essential information.  Note that one should <emphasis>not</>
       rely on <function>PQfsize</function> to obtain the actual data
       length.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3000

3001
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqnparams">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007
     <term>
      <function>PQnparams</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQnparams</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3008

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3009 3010 3011
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the number of parameters of a prepared statement.
3012 3013 3014
<synopsis>
int PQnparams(const PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3015
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3016

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3017 3018 3019 3020 3021 3022 3023
      <para>
       This function is only useful when inspecting the result of
       <function>PQdescribePrepared</>.  For other types of queries it
       will return zero.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3024

3025
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqparamtype">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3026 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031
     <term>
      <function>PQparamtype</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQparamtype</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3032

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3033 3034 3035 3036
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the data type of the indicated statement parameter.
       Parameter numbers start at 0.
3037 3038 3039
<synopsis>
Oid PQparamtype(const PGresult *res, int param_number);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3040
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3041

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3042 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 3048
      <para>
       This function is only useful when inspecting the result of
       <function>PQdescribePrepared</>.  For other types of queries it
       will return zero.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3049

3050
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqprint">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056
     <term>
      <function>PQprint</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQprint</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3057

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3058 3059 3060 3061
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Prints out all the rows and,  optionally,  the column names  to
       the specified output stream.
3062
<synopsis>
3063 3064 3065
void PQprint(FILE *fout,      /* output stream */
             const PGresult *res,
             const PQprintOpt *po);
3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077
typedef struct
{
    pqbool  header;      /* print output field headings and row count */
    pqbool  align;       /* fill align the fields */
    pqbool  standard;    /* old brain dead format */
    pqbool  html3;       /* output HTML tables */
    pqbool  expanded;    /* expand tables */
    pqbool  pager;       /* use pager for output if needed */
    char    *fieldSep;   /* field separator */
    char    *tableOpt;   /* attributes for HTML table element */
    char    *caption;    /* HTML table caption */
    char    **fieldName; /* null-terminated array of replacement field names */
3078
} PQprintOpt;
3079
</synopsis>
3080
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3081

3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090
      <para>
       This function was formerly used by <application>psql</application>
       to print query results, but this is no longer the case.  Note
       that it assumes all the data is in text format.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </sect2>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3091

3092
  <sect2 id="libpq-exec-nonselect">
3093
   <title>Retrieving Other Result Information</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3094

3095
   <para>
3096 3097
    These functions are used to extract other information from
    <structname>PGresult</structname> objects.
3098
   </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3099

3100
   <variablelist>
3101
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqcmdstatus">
3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3110 3111 3112
     <term>
      <function>PQcmdStatus</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQcmdStatus</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the command status tag from the SQL command that generated
       the <structname>PGresult</structname>.
3113 3114 3115
<synopsis>
char *PQcmdStatus(PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
3116 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3126
      </para>

      <para>
       Commonly this is just the name of the command, but it might include
       additional data such as the number of rows processed. The caller
       should not free the result directly. It will be freed when the
       associated <structname>PGresult</> handle is passed to
       <function>PQclear</function>.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3127

3128
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqcmdtuples">
3129 3130 3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 3136 3137 3138
     <term>
      <function>PQcmdTuples</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQcmdTuples</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the number of rows affected by the SQL command.
3139 3140 3141
<synopsis>
char *PQcmdTuples(PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
3142
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3143

3144 3145 3146 3147
      <para>
       This function returns a string containing the number of rows
       affected by the <acronym>SQL</> statement that generated the
       <structname>PGresult</>. This function can only be used following
3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153
       the execution of a <command>SELECT</>, <command>CREATE TABLE AS</>,
       <command>INSERT</>, <command>UPDATE</>, <command>DELETE</>,
       <command>MOVE</>, <command>FETCH</>, or <command>COPY</> statement,
       or an <command>EXECUTE</> of a prepared query that contains an
       <command>INSERT</>, <command>UPDATE</>, or <command>DELETE</> statement.
       If the command that generated the <structname>PGresult</> was anything
3154 3155 3156 3157 3158 3159 3160
       else, <function>PQcmdTuples</> returns an empty string. The caller
       should not free the return value directly. It will be freed when
       the associated <structname>PGresult</> handle is passed to
       <function>PQclear</function>.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3161

3162
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqoidvalue">
3163 3164 3165 3166 3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 3176 3177 3178 3179
     <term>
      <function>PQoidValue</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQoidValue</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the OID<indexterm><primary>OID</><secondary>in libpq</></>
       of the inserted row, if the <acronym>SQL</> command was an
       <command>INSERT</> that inserted exactly one row into a table that
       has OIDs, or a <command>EXECUTE</> of a prepared query containing
       a suitable <command>INSERT</> statement.  Otherwise, this function
       returns <literal>InvalidOid</literal>. This function will also
       return <literal>InvalidOid</literal> if the table affected by the
       <command>INSERT</> statement does not contain OIDs.
3180 3181 3182
<synopsis>
Oid PQoidValue(const PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
3183 3184 3185
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3186

3187
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqoidstatus">
3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 3194 3195 3196
     <term>
      <function>PQoidStatus</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQoidStatus</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
3197 3198 3199 3200
       This function is deprecated in favor of
       <function>PQoidValue</function> and is not thread-safe.
       It returns a string with the OID of the inserted row, while
       <function>PQoidValue</function> returns the OID value.
3201 3202 3203
<synopsis>
char *PQoidStatus(const PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
3204
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3205

3206 3207 3208
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3209

3210
  </sect2>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3211

3212 3213
  <sect2 id="libpq-exec-escape-string">
   <title>Escaping Strings for Inclusion in SQL Commands</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3214

3215 3216 3217 3218
   <indexterm zone="libpq-exec-escape-string">
    <primary>escaping strings</primary>
    <secondary>in libpq</secondary>
   </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3219

3220
   <variablelist>
3221
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqescapeliteral">
3222
     <term>
3223
      <function>PQescapeLiteral</function>
3224
      <indexterm>
3225
       <primary>PQescapeLiteral</primary>
3226 3227
      </indexterm>
     </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3228

3229 3230
     <listitem>
     <para>
3231
<synopsis>
3232
char *PQescapeLiteral(PGconn *conn, const char *str, size_t length);
3233
</synopsis>
3234 3235 3236 3237
     </para>

     <para>
      <function>PQescapeLiteral</function> escapes a string for
3238 3239 3240 3241
      use within an SQL command.  This is useful when inserting data
      values as literal constants in SQL commands.  Certain characters
      (such as quotes and backslashes) must be escaped to prevent them
      from being interpreted specially by the SQL parser.
3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 3260 3261 3262
      <function>PQescapeLiteral</> performs this operation.
     </para>

     <para>
      <function>PQescapeLiteral</> returns an escaped version of the
      <parameter>str</parameter> parameter in memory allocated with
      <function>malloc()</>.  This memory should be freed using
      <function>PQfreemem()</> when the result is no longer needed.
      A terminating zero byte is not required, and should not be
      counted in <parameter>length</>.  (If a terminating zero byte is found
      before <parameter>length</> bytes are processed,
      <function>PQescapeLiteral</> stops at the zero; the behavior is
      thus rather like <function>strncpy</>.) The
      return string has all special characters replaced so that they can
      be properly processed by the <productname>PostgreSQL</productname>
      string literal parser.  A terminating zero byte is also added.  The
      single quotes that must surround <productname>PostgreSQL</productname>
      string literals are included in the result string.
     </para>

     <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
3263
      On error, <function>PQescapeLiteral</> returns <symbol>NULL</> and a suitable
3264
      message is stored in the <parameter>conn</> object.
3265
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3266

3267 3268 3269 3270 3271 3272 3273 3274 3275
     <tip>
      <para>
       It is especially important to do proper escaping when handling
       strings that were received from an untrustworthy source.
       Otherwise there is a security risk: you are vulnerable to
       <quote>SQL injection</> attacks wherein unwanted SQL commands are
       fed to your database.
      </para>
     </tip>
3276

3277 3278 3279 3280
     <para>
      Note that it is not necessary nor correct to do escaping when a data
      value is passed as a separate parameter in <function>PQexecParams</> or
      its sibling routines.
3281 3282 3283 3284
     </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

3285
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqescapeidentifier">
3286 3287 3288 3289 3290 3291 3292 3293 3294
     <term>
      <function>PQescapeIdentifier</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQescapeIdentifier</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
     <para>
3295
<synopsis>
3296
char *PQescapeIdentifier(PGconn *conn, const char *str, size_t length);
3297
</synopsis>
3298 3299 3300
     </para>

     <para>
3301
      <function>PQescapeIdentifier</function> escapes a string for
3302 3303 3304 3305
      use as an SQL identifier, such as a table, column, or function name.
      This is useful when a user-supplied identifier might contain
      special characters that would otherwise not be interpreted as part
      of the identifier by the SQL parser, or when the identifier might
3306
      contain upper case characters whose case should be preserved.
3307
     </para>
3308

3309 3310 3311 3312 3313 3314 3315 3316 3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 3323 3324 3325
     <para>
      <function>PQescapeIdentifier</> returns a version of the
      <parameter>str</parameter> parameter escaped as an SQL identifier
      in memory allocated with <function>malloc()</>.  This memory must be
      freed using <function>PQfreemem()</> when the result is no longer
      needed.  A terminating zero byte is not required, and should not be
      counted in <parameter>length</>.  (If a terminating zero byte is found
      before <parameter>length</> bytes are processed,
      <function>PQescapeIdentifier</> stops at the zero; the behavior is
      thus rather like <function>strncpy</>.) The
      return string has all special characters replaced so that it
      will be properly processed as an SQL identifier.  A terminating zero byte
      is also added.  The return string will also be surrounded by double
      quotes.
     </para>

     <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
3326
      On error, <function>PQescapeIdentifier</> returns <symbol>NULL</> and a suitable
3327 3328 3329 3330 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 3336 3337 3338 3339
      message is stored in the <parameter>conn</> object.
     </para>

     <tip>
      <para>
       As with string literals, to prevent SQL injection attacks,
       SQL identifiers must be escaped when they are received from an
       untrustworthy source.
      </para>
     </tip>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

3340
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqescapestringconn">
3341 3342 3343 3344 3345 3346 3347 3348 3349
     <term>
      <function>PQescapeStringConn</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQescapeStringConn</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
     <para>
3350 3351 3352 3353 3354
<synopsis>
size_t PQescapeStringConn(PGconn *conn,
                          char *to, const char *from, size_t length,
                          int *error);
</synopsis>
3355
     </para>
3356

3357
     <para>
3358 3359 3360 3361 3362 3363
      <function>PQescapeStringConn</> escapes string literals, much like
      <function>PQescapeLiteral</>.  Unlike <function>PQescapeLiteral</>,
      the caller is responsible for providing an appropriately sized buffer.
      Furthermore, <function>PQescapeStringConn</> does not generate the
      single quotes that must surround <productname>PostgreSQL</> string
      literals; they should be provided in the SQL command that the
3364 3365 3366 3367 3368 3369 3370 3371 3372 3373 3374 3375 3376
      result is inserted into.  The parameter <parameter>from</> points to
      the first character of the string that is to be escaped, and the
      <parameter>length</> parameter gives the number of bytes in this
      string.  A terminating zero byte is not required, and should not be
      counted in <parameter>length</>.  (If a terminating zero byte is found
      before <parameter>length</> bytes are processed,
      <function>PQescapeStringConn</> stops at the zero; the behavior is
      thus rather like <function>strncpy</>.) <parameter>to</> shall point
      to a buffer that is able to hold at least one more byte than twice
      the value of <parameter>length</>, otherwise the behavior is undefined.
      Behavior is likewise undefined if the <parameter>to</> and
      <parameter>from</> strings overlap.
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3377

3378
     <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
3379
      If the <parameter>error</> parameter is not <symbol>NULL</>, then
3380 3381 3382 3383 3384
      <literal>*error</> is set to zero on success, nonzero on error.
      Presently the only possible error conditions involve invalid multibyte
      encoding in the source string.  The output string is still generated
      on error, but it can be expected that the server will reject it as
      malformed.  On error, a suitable message is stored in the
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
3385
      <parameter>conn</> object, whether or not <parameter>error</> is <symbol>NULL</>.
3386
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3387

3388 3389 3390 3391 3392 3393
     <para>
      <function>PQescapeStringConn</> returns the number of bytes written
      to <parameter>to</>, not including the terminating zero byte.
     </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
3394

3395
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqescapestring">
3396 3397 3398 3399 3400 3401
     <term>
      <function>PQescapeString</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQescapeString</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3402

3403 3404
     <listitem>
     <para>
3405 3406
       <function>PQescapeString</> is an older, deprecated version of
       <function>PQescapeStringConn</>.
3407 3408 3409
<synopsis>
size_t PQescapeString (char *to, const char *from, size_t length);
</synopsis>
3410
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3411

3412
     <para>
3413 3414 3415
      The only difference from <function>PQescapeStringConn</> is that
      <function>PQescapeString</> does not take <structname>PGconn</>
      or <parameter>error</> parameters.
3416 3417 3418 3419 3420
      Because of this, it cannot adjust its behavior depending on the
      connection properties (such as character encoding) and therefore
      <emphasis>it might give the wrong results</>.  Also, it has no way
      to report error conditions.
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3421

3422
     <para>
3423
      <function>PQescapeString</> can be used safely in
3424 3425 3426 3427 3428 3429 3430 3431
      client programs that work with only one <productname>PostgreSQL</>
      connection at a time (in this case it can find out what it needs to
      know <quote>behind the scenes</>).  In other contexts it is a security
      hazard and should be avoided in favor of
      <function>PQescapeStringConn</>.
     </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3432

3433
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqescapebyteaconn">
3434 3435 3436 3437 3438 3439 3440 3441 3442 3443 3444 3445
     <term>
      <function>PQescapeByteaConn</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQescapeByteaConn</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
     <para>
       Escapes binary data for use within an SQL command with the type
       <type>bytea</type>.  As with <function>PQescapeStringConn</function>,
       this is only used when inserting data directly into an SQL command string.
3446 3447 3448 3449 3450 3451
<synopsis>
unsigned char *PQescapeByteaConn(PGconn *conn,
                                 const unsigned char *from,
                                 size_t from_length,
                                 size_t *to_length);
</synopsis>
3452
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3453

3454
      <para>
3455 3456 3457 3458 3459
       Certain byte values must be escaped when used as part of a
       <type>bytea</type> literal in an <acronym>SQL</acronym> statement.
       <function>PQescapeByteaConn</function> escapes bytes using
       either hex encoding or backslash escaping.  See <xref
       linkend="datatype-binary"> for more information.
3460
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3461

3462 3463 3464 3465 3466 3467 3468 3469 3470 3471
      <para>
       The <parameter>from</parameter> parameter points to the first
       byte of the string that is to be escaped, and the
       <parameter>from_length</parameter> parameter gives the number of
       bytes in this binary string.  (A terminating zero byte is
       neither necessary nor counted.)  The <parameter>to_length</parameter>
       parameter points to a variable that will hold the resultant
       escaped string length. This result string length includes the terminating
       zero byte of the result.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3472

3473 3474 3475
      <para>
       <function>PQescapeByteaConn</> returns an escaped version of the
       <parameter>from</parameter> parameter binary string in memory
3476
       allocated with <function>malloc()</>.  This memory should be freed using
3477 3478 3479 3480 3481 3482 3483 3484
       <function>PQfreemem()</> when the result is no longer needed.  The
       return string has all special characters replaced so that they can
       be properly processed by the <productname>PostgreSQL</productname>
       string literal parser, and the <type>bytea</type> input function. A
       terminating zero byte is also added.  The single quotes that must
       surround <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> string literals are
       not part of the result string.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3485

3486
      <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
3487
       On error, a null pointer is returned, and a suitable error message
3488 3489 3490 3491 3492
       is stored in the <parameter>conn</> object.  Currently, the only
       possible error is insufficient memory for the result string.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3493

3494
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqescapebytea">
3495 3496 3497 3498 3499 3500 3501 3502 3503 3504 3505
     <term>
      <function>PQescapeBytea</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQescapeBytea</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       <function>PQescapeBytea</> is an older, deprecated version of
       <function>PQescapeByteaConn</>.
3506 3507 3508 3509 3510
<synopsis>
unsigned char *PQescapeBytea(const unsigned char *from,
                             size_t from_length,
                             size_t *to_length);
</synopsis>
3511
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3512

3513 3514 3515
      <para>
       The only difference from <function>PQescapeByteaConn</> is that
       <function>PQescapeBytea</> does not take a <structname>PGconn</>
3516 3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 3522
       parameter.  Because of this, <function>PQescapeBytea</> can
       only be used safely in client programs that use a single
       <productname>PostgreSQL</> connection at a time (in this case
       it can find out what it needs to know <quote>behind the
       scenes</>).  It <emphasis>might give the wrong results</> if
       used in programs that use multiple database connections (use
       <function>PQescapeByteaConn</> in such cases).
3523 3524 3525
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3526

3527
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqunescapebytea">
3528 3529 3530 3531 3532 3533 3534 3535 3536 3537 3538 3539 3540
     <term>
      <function>PQunescapeBytea</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQunescapeBytea</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Converts a string representation of binary data into binary data
       &mdash; the reverse of <function>PQescapeBytea</function>.  This
       is needed when retrieving <type>bytea</type> data in text format,
       but not when retrieving it in binary format.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3541

3542 3543 3544
<synopsis>
unsigned char *PQunescapeBytea(const unsigned char *from, size_t *to_length);
</synopsis>
3545
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3546

3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552
      <para>
       The <parameter>from</parameter> parameter points to a string
       such as might be returned by <function>PQgetvalue</function> when applied
       to a <type>bytea</type> column. <function>PQunescapeBytea</function>
       converts this string representation into its binary representation.
       It returns a pointer to a buffer allocated with
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
3553
       <function>malloc()</function>, or <symbol>NULL</> on error, and puts the size of
3554 3555 3556
       the buffer in <parameter>to_length</parameter>. The result must be
       freed using <function>PQfreemem</> when it is no longer needed.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3557

3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567
      <para>
       This conversion is not exactly the inverse of
       <function>PQescapeBytea</function>, because the string is not expected
       to be <quote>escaped</> when received from <function>PQgetvalue</function>.
       In particular this means there is no need for string quoting considerations,
       and so no need for a <structname>PGconn</> parameter.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3568

3569 3570 3571
  </sect2>

 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3572

3573 3574
 <sect1 id="libpq-async">
  <title>Asynchronous Command Processing</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3575

3576 3577 3578
  <indexterm zone="libpq-async">
   <primary>nonblocking connection</primary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3579

3580 3581 3582 3583
  <para>
   The <function>PQexec</function> function is adequate for submitting
   commands in normal, synchronous applications.  It has a couple of
   deficiencies, however, that can be of importance to some users:
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3584

3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3593 3594 3595 3596 3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 3602
   <itemizedlist>
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <function>PQexec</function> waits for the command to be completed.
      The application might have other work to do (such as maintaining a
      user interface), in which case it won't want to block waiting for
      the response.
     </para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Since the execution of the client application is suspended while it
      waits for the result, it is hard for the application to decide that
      it would like to try to cancel the ongoing command.  (It can be done
      from a signal handler, but not otherwise.)
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3603

3604 3605 3606 3607 3608 3609 3610 3611 3612 3613 3614
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <function>PQexec</function> can return only one
      <structname>PGresult</structname> structure.  If the submitted command
      string contains multiple <acronym>SQL</acronym> commands, all but
      the last <structname>PGresult</structname> are discarded by
      <function>PQexec</function>.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3615

3616 3617 3618 3619 3620 3621 3622 3623 3624 3625 3626 3627 3628 3629 3630 3631 3632 3633
  <para>
   Applications that do not like these limitations can instead use the
   underlying functions that <function>PQexec</function> is built from:
   <function>PQsendQuery</function> and <function>PQgetResult</function>.
   There are also
   <function>PQsendQueryParams</function>,
   <function>PQsendPrepare</function>,
   <function>PQsendQueryPrepared</function>,
   <function>PQsendDescribePrepared</function>, and
   <function>PQsendDescribePortal</function>,
   which can be used with <function>PQgetResult</function> to duplicate
   the functionality of
   <function>PQexecParams</function>,
   <function>PQprepare</function>,
   <function>PQexecPrepared</function>,
   <function>PQdescribePrepared</function>, and
   <function>PQdescribePortal</function>
   respectively.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3634

3635
   <variablelist>
3636
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsendquery">
3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649
     <term>
      <function>PQsendQuery</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQsendQuery</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Submits a command to the server without waiting for the result(s).
       1 is returned if the command was successfully dispatched and 0 if
       not (in which case, use <function>PQerrorMessage</> to get more
       information about the failure).
3650 3651 3652
<synopsis>
int PQsendQuery(PGconn *conn, const char *command);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3653

3654 3655 3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 3661
       After successfully calling <function>PQsendQuery</function>, call
       <function>PQgetResult</function> one or more times to obtain the
       results.  <function>PQsendQuery</function> cannot be called again
       (on the same connection) until <function>PQgetResult</function>
       has returned a null pointer, indicating that the command is done.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3662

3663
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsendqueryparams">
3664 3665 3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 3671 3672 3673 3674
     <term>
      <function>PQsendQueryParams</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQsendQueryParams</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Submits a command and separate parameters to the server without
       waiting for the result(s).
3675 3676 3677 3678 3679 3680 3681 3682 3683 3684
<synopsis>
int PQsendQueryParams(PGconn *conn,
                      const char *command,
                      int nParams,
                      const Oid *paramTypes,
                      const char * const *paramValues,
                      const int *paramLengths,
                      const int *paramFormats,
                      int resultFormat);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3685

3686 3687 3688 3689 3690 3691 3692 3693 3694
       This is equivalent to <function>PQsendQuery</function> except that
       query parameters can be specified separately from the query string.
       The function's parameters are handled identically to
       <function>PQexecParams</function>.  Like
       <function>PQexecParams</function>, it will not work on 2.0-protocol
       connections, and it allows only one command in the query string.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3695

3696
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsendprepare">
3697 3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 3707
     <term>
      <function>PQsendPrepare</>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQsendPrepare</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Sends a request to create a prepared statement with the given
       parameters, without waiting for completion.
3708 3709 3710 3711 3712 3713 3714
<synopsis>
int PQsendPrepare(PGconn *conn,
                  const char *stmtName,
                  const char *query,
                  int nParams,
                  const Oid *paramTypes);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3715

3716 3717 3718 3719 3720 3721 3722 3723 3724 3725 3726
       This is an asynchronous version of <function>PQprepare</>: it
       returns 1 if it was able to dispatch the request, and 0 if not.
       After a successful call, call <function>PQgetResult</function> to
       determine whether the server successfully created the prepared
       statement.  The function's parameters are handled identically to
       <function>PQprepare</function>.  Like
       <function>PQprepare</function>, it will not work on 2.0-protocol
       connections.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3727

3728
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsendqueryprepared">
3729 3730 3731 3732 3733 3734 3735 3736 3737 3738 3739
     <term>
      <function>PQsendQueryPrepared</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQsendQueryPrepared</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Sends a request to execute a prepared statement with given
       parameters, without waiting for the result(s).
3740 3741 3742 3743 3744 3745 3746 3747 3748
<synopsis>
int PQsendQueryPrepared(PGconn *conn,
                        const char *stmtName,
                        int nParams,
                        const char * const *paramValues,
                        const int *paramLengths,
                        const int *paramFormats,
                        int resultFormat);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3749

3750 3751 3752 3753 3754 3755 3756 3757 3758 3759
       This is similar to <function>PQsendQueryParams</function>, but
       the command to be executed is specified by naming a
       previously-prepared statement, instead of giving a query string.
       The function's parameters are handled identically to
       <function>PQexecPrepared</function>.  Like
       <function>PQexecPrepared</function>, it will not work on
       2.0-protocol connections.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3760

3761
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsenddescribeprepared">
3762 3763 3764 3765 3766 3767 3768 3769 3770 3771 3772
     <term>
      <function>PQsendDescribePrepared</>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQsendDescribePrepared</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Submits a request to obtain information about the specified
       prepared statement, without waiting for completion.
3773 3774 3775
<synopsis>
int PQsendDescribePrepared(PGconn *conn, const char *stmtName);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3776

3777 3778 3779 3780 3781 3782 3783 3784 3785 3786
       This is an asynchronous version of <function>PQdescribePrepared</>:
       it returns 1 if it was able to dispatch the request, and 0 if not.
       After a successful call, call <function>PQgetResult</function> to
       obtain the results.  The function's parameters are handled
       identically to <function>PQdescribePrepared</function>.  Like
       <function>PQdescribePrepared</function>, it will not work on
       2.0-protocol connections.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3787

3788
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsenddescribeportal">
3789 3790 3791 3792 3793 3794 3795 3796 3797 3798 3799
     <term>
      <function>PQsendDescribePortal</>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQsendDescribePortal</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Submits a request to obtain information about the specified
       portal, without waiting for completion.
3800 3801 3802
<synopsis>
int PQsendDescribePortal(PGconn *conn, const char *portalName);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3803

3804 3805 3806 3807 3808 3809 3810 3811 3812 3813
       This is an asynchronous version of <function>PQdescribePortal</>:
       it returns 1 if it was able to dispatch the request, and 0 if not.
       After a successful call, call <function>PQgetResult</function> to
       obtain the results.  The function's parameters are handled
       identically to <function>PQdescribePortal</function>.  Like
       <function>PQdescribePortal</function>, it will not work on
       2.0-protocol connections.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3814

3815
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetresult">
3816 3817 3818 3819 3820 3821 3822 3823 3824 3825 3826 3827 3828 3829 3830 3831
     <term>
      <function>PQgetResult</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQgetResult</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Waits for the next result from a prior
       <function>PQsendQuery</function>,
       <function>PQsendQueryParams</function>,
       <function>PQsendPrepare</function>, or
       <function>PQsendQueryPrepared</function> call, and returns it.
       A null pointer is returned when the command is complete and there
       will be no more results.
3832 3833 3834
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQgetResult(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
3835
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3836

3837 3838 3839 3840 3841 3842 3843 3844 3845 3846 3847 3848 3849 3850
      <para>
       <function>PQgetResult</function> must be called repeatedly until
       it returns a null pointer, indicating that the command is done.
       (If called when no command is active,
       <function>PQgetResult</function> will just return a null pointer
       at once.) Each non-null result from
       <function>PQgetResult</function> should be processed using the
       same <structname>PGresult</> accessor functions previously
       described.  Don't forget to free each result object with
       <function>PQclear</function> when done with it.  Note that
       <function>PQgetResult</function> will block only if a command is
       active and the necessary response data has not yet been read by
       <function>PQconsumeInput</function>.
      </para>
3851 3852 3853 3854 3855 3856 3857 3858 3859

      <note>
       <para>
        Even when <function>PQresultStatus</function> indicates a fatal
        error, <function>PQgetResult</function> should be called until it
        returns a null pointer to allow <application>libpq</> to
        process the error information completely.
       </para>
      </note>
3860 3861 3862 3863
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3864

3865 3866 3867 3868 3869 3870 3871 3872 3873 3874 3875 3876
  <para>
   Using <function>PQsendQuery</function> and
   <function>PQgetResult</function> solves one of
   <function>PQexec</function>'s problems:  If a command string contains
   multiple <acronym>SQL</acronym> commands, the results of those commands
   can be obtained individually.  (This allows a simple form of overlapped
   processing, by the way: the client can be handling the results of one
   command while the server is still working on later queries in the same
   command string.)  However, calling <function>PQgetResult</function>
   will still cause the client to block until the server completes the
   next <acronym>SQL</acronym> command.  This can be avoided by proper
   use of two more functions:
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3877

3878
   <variablelist>
3879
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconsumeinput">
3880 3881 3882 3883 3884 3885 3886 3887 3888 3889
     <term>
      <function>PQconsumeInput</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQconsumeInput</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       If input is available from the server, consume it.
3890 3891 3892
<synopsis>
int PQconsumeInput(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
3893
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3894

3895 3896 3897 3898 3899 3900 3901 3902 3903 3904 3905 3906 3907 3908 3909 3910 3911 3912 3913 3914 3915 3916 3917
      <para>
       <function>PQconsumeInput</function> normally returns 1 indicating
       <quote>no error</quote>, but returns 0 if there was some kind of
       trouble (in which case <function>PQerrorMessage</function> can be
       consulted).  Note that the result does not say whether any input
       data was actually collected. After calling
       <function>PQconsumeInput</function>, the application can check
       <function>PQisBusy</function> and/or
       <function>PQnotifies</function> to see if their state has changed.
      </para>

      <para>
       <function>PQconsumeInput</function> can be called even if the
       application is not prepared to deal with a result or notification
       just yet.  The function will read available data and save it in
       a buffer, thereby causing a <function>select()</function>
       read-ready indication to go away.  The application can thus use
       <function>PQconsumeInput</function> to clear the
       <function>select()</function> condition immediately, and then
       examine the results at leisure.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3918

3919
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqisbusy">
3920 3921 3922 3923 3924 3925 3926 3927 3928 3929 3930 3931 3932
     <term>
      <function>PQisBusy</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQisBusy</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns 1 if a command is busy, that is,
       <function>PQgetResult</function> would block waiting for input.
       A 0 return indicates that <function>PQgetResult</function> can be
       called with assurance of not blocking.
3933 3934 3935
<synopsis>
int PQisBusy(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
3936
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3937

3938 3939 3940 3941 3942 3943 3944 3945 3946
      <para>
       <function>PQisBusy</function> will not itself attempt to read data
       from the server; therefore <function>PQconsumeInput</function>
       must be invoked first, or the busy state will never end.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3947

3948 3949 3950 3951 3952 3953 3954 3955 3956 3957 3958 3959 3960 3961 3962
  <para>
   A typical application using these functions will have a main loop that
   uses <function>select()</function> or <function>poll()</> to wait for
   all the conditions that it must respond to.  One of the conditions
   will be input available from the server, which in terms of
   <function>select()</function> means readable data on the file
   descriptor identified by <function>PQsocket</function>.  When the main
   loop detects input ready, it should call
   <function>PQconsumeInput</function> to read the input.  It can then
   call <function>PQisBusy</function>, followed by
   <function>PQgetResult</function> if <function>PQisBusy</function>
   returns false (0).  It can also call <function>PQnotifies</function>
   to detect <command>NOTIFY</> messages (see <xref
   linkend="libpq-notify">).
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3963

3964 3965 3966 3967 3968 3969 3970 3971 3972 3973 3974
  <para>
   A client that uses
   <function>PQsendQuery</function>/<function>PQgetResult</function>
   can also attempt to cancel a command that is still being processed
   by the server; see <xref linkend="libpq-cancel">.  But regardless of
   the return value of <function>PQcancel</function>, the application
   must continue with the normal result-reading sequence using
   <function>PQgetResult</function>.  A successful cancellation will
   simply cause the command to terminate sooner than it would have
   otherwise.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3975

3976 3977 3978 3979 3980 3981 3982 3983 3984 3985
  <para>
   By using the functions described above, it is possible to avoid
   blocking while waiting for input from the database server.  However,
   it is still possible that the application will block waiting to send
   output to the server.  This is relatively uncommon but can happen if
   very long SQL commands or data values are sent.  (It is much more
   probable if the application sends data via <command>COPY IN</command>,
   however.)  To prevent this possibility and achieve completely
   nonblocking database operation, the following additional functions
   can be used.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3986

3987
   <variablelist>
3988
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsetnonblocking">
3989 3990 3991 3992 3993 3994 3995 3996 3997 3998
     <term>
      <function>PQsetnonblocking</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQsetnonblocking</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Sets the nonblocking status of the connection.
3999 4000 4001
<synopsis>
int PQsetnonblocking(PGconn *conn, int arg);
</synopsis>
4002
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4003

4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017 4018 4019 4020 4021 4022 4023
      <para>
       Sets the state of the connection to nonblocking if
       <parameter>arg</parameter> is 1, or blocking if
       <parameter>arg</parameter> is 0.  Returns 0 if OK, -1 if error.
      </para>

      <para>
       In the nonblocking state, calls to
       <function>PQsendQuery</function>, <function>PQputline</function>,
       <function>PQputnbytes</function>, and
       <function>PQendcopy</function> will not block but instead return
       an error if they need to be called again.
      </para>

      <para>
       Note that <function>PQexec</function> does not honor nonblocking
       mode; if it is called, it will act in blocking fashion anyway.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4024

4025
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqisnonblocking">
4026 4027 4028 4029 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035
     <term>
      <function>PQisnonblocking</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQisnonblocking</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the blocking status of the database connection.
4036 4037 4038
<synopsis>
int PQisnonblocking(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
4039
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4040

4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046
      <para>
       Returns 1 if the connection is set to nonblocking mode and 0 if
       blocking.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4047

4048
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqflush">
4049 4050 4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058 4059 4060 4061 4062
     <term>
      <function>PQflush</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQflush</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
       Attempts to flush any queued output data to the server.  Returns
       0 if successful (or if the send queue is empty), -1 if it failed
       for some reason, or 1 if it was unable to send all the data in
       the send queue yet (this case can only occur if the connection
       is nonblocking).
4063 4064 4065
<synopsis>
int PQflush(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
4066 4067 4068 4069 4070
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4071

4072 4073 4074 4075 4076 4077 4078
  <para>
   After sending any command or data on a nonblocking connection, call
   <function>PQflush</function>.  If it returns 1, wait for the socket
   to be write-ready and call it again; repeat until it returns 0.  Once
   <function>PQflush</function> returns 0, wait for the socket to be
   read-ready and then read the response as described above.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4079

4080
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4081

4082 4083
 <sect1 id="libpq-cancel">
  <title>Cancelling Queries in Progress</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4084

4085 4086 4087
  <indexterm zone="libpq-cancel">
   <primary>canceling</primary>
   <secondary>SQL command</secondary>
4088
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4089

4090 4091 4092 4093
  <para>
   A client application can request cancellation of a command that is
   still being processed by the server, using the functions described in
   this section.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4094

4095
   <variablelist>
4096
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetcancel">
4097 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107
     <term>
      <function>PQgetCancel</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQgetCancel</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Creates a data structure containing the information needed to cancel
       a command issued through a particular database connection.
4108 4109 4110
<synopsis>
PGcancel *PQgetCancel(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
4111
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4112

4113 4114 4115 4116
      <para>
       <function>PQgetCancel</function> creates a
       <structname>PGcancel</><indexterm><primary>PGcancel</></> object
       given a <structname>PGconn</> connection object.  It will return
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
4117
       <symbol>NULL</> if the given <parameter>conn</> is <symbol>NULL</> or an invalid
4118 4119 4120 4121 4122 4123 4124 4125
       connection.  The <structname>PGcancel</> object is an opaque
       structure that is not meant to be accessed directly by the
       application; it can only be passed to <function>PQcancel</function>
       or <function>PQfreeCancel</function>.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

4126
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfreecancel">
4127 4128 4129 4130 4131 4132 4133 4134 4135 4136
     <term>
      <function>PQfreeCancel</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQfreeCancel</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Frees a data structure created by <function>PQgetCancel</function>.
4137 4138 4139
<synopsis>
void PQfreeCancel(PGcancel *cancel);
</synopsis>
4140
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4141

4142 4143 4144 4145 4146 4147
      <para>
       <function>PQfreeCancel</function> frees a data object previously created
       by <function>PQgetCancel</function>.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4148

4149
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqcancel">
4150 4151 4152 4153 4154 4155 4156 4157 4158 4159
     <term>
      <function>PQcancel</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQcancel</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Requests that the server abandon processing of the current command.
4160 4161 4162
<synopsis>
int PQcancel(PGcancel *cancel, char *errbuf, int errbufsize);
</synopsis>
4163
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4164

4165 4166 4167
      <para>
       The return value is 1 if the cancel request was successfully
       dispatched and 0 if not.  If not, <parameter>errbuf</> is filled
4168
       with an explanatory error message.  <parameter>errbuf</>
4169 4170 4171
       must be a char array of size <parameter>errbufsize</> (the
       recommended size is 256 bytes).
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4172

4173 4174 4175 4176 4177 4178 4179 4180
      <para>
       Successful dispatch is no guarantee that the request will have
       any effect, however.  If the cancellation is effective, the current
       command will terminate early and return an error result.  If the
       cancellation fails (say, because the server was already done
       processing the command), then there will be no visible result at
       all.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4181

4182 4183 4184 4185 4186 4187 4188 4189 4190 4191 4192
      <para>
       <function>PQcancel</function> can safely be invoked from a signal
       handler, if the <parameter>errbuf</> is a local variable in the
       signal handler.  The <structname>PGcancel</> object is read-only
       as far as <function>PQcancel</function> is concerned, so it can
       also be invoked from a thread that is separate from the one
       manipulating the <structname>PGconn</> object.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4193

4194
   <variablelist>
4195
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqrequestcancel">
4196 4197 4198 4199 4200 4201 4202 4203 4204
     <term>
      <function>PQrequestCancel</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQrequestCancel</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
4205
       <function>PQrequestCancel</function> is a deprecated variant of
4206
       <function>PQcancel</function>.
4207 4208 4209
<synopsis>
int PQrequestCancel(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
4210
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4211

4212
      <para>
4213 4214
       Requests that the server abandon processing of the current
       command.  It operates directly on the
4215 4216 4217 4218 4219 4220 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226
       <structname>PGconn</> object, and in case of failure stores the
       error message in the <structname>PGconn</> object (whence it can
       be retrieved by <function>PQerrorMessage</function>).  Although
       the functionality is the same, this approach creates hazards for
       multiple-thread programs and signal handlers, since it is possible
       that overwriting the <structname>PGconn</>'s error message will
       mess up the operation currently in progress on the connection.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4227

4228
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4229

4230 4231
 <sect1 id="libpq-fastpath">
  <title>The Fast-Path Interface</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4232

4233 4234 4235
  <indexterm zone="libpq-fastpath">
   <primary>fast path</primary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4236

4237 4238 4239 4240
  <para>
   <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> provides a fast-path interface
   to send simple function calls to the server.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4241

4242 4243 4244 4245 4246 4247 4248 4249 4250
  <tip>
   <para>
    This interface is somewhat obsolete, as one can achieve similar
    performance and greater functionality by setting up a prepared
    statement to define the function call.  Then, executing the statement
    with binary transmission of parameters and results substitutes for a
    fast-path function call.
   </para>
  </tip>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4251

4252 4253 4254
  <para>
   The function <function>PQfn</function><indexterm><primary>PQfn</></>
   requests execution of a server function via the fast-path interface:
4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 4260 4261 4262 4263 4264 4265 4266 4267 4268 4269 4270 4271 4272 4273 4274
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQfn(PGconn *conn,
               int fnid,
               int *result_buf,
               int *result_len,
               int result_is_int,
               const PQArgBlock *args,
               int nargs);

typedef struct
{
    int len;
    int isint;
    union
    {
        int *ptr;
        int integer;
    } u;
} PQArgBlock;
</synopsis>
4275
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4276

4277 4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295 4296 4297 4298 4299
  <para>
   The <parameter>fnid</> argument is the OID of the function to be
   executed.  <parameter>args</> and <parameter>nargs</> define the
   parameters to be passed to the function; they must match the declared
   function argument list.  When the <parameter>isint</> field of a
   parameter structure is true, the <parameter>u.integer</> value is sent
   to the server as an integer of the indicated length (this must be 1,
   2, or 4 bytes); proper byte-swapping occurs.  When <parameter>isint</>
   is false, the indicated number of bytes at <parameter>*u.ptr</> are
   sent with no processing; the data must be in the format expected by
   the server for binary transmission of the function's argument data
   type.  <parameter>result_buf</parameter> is the buffer in which to
   place the return value.  The caller must  have  allocated sufficient
   space to store the return value.  (There is no check!) The actual result
   length will be returned in the integer pointed to  by
   <parameter>result_len</parameter>.  If a 1, 2, or 4-byte integer result
   is expected, set <parameter>result_is_int</parameter> to 1, otherwise
   set it to 0.  Setting <parameter>result_is_int</parameter> to 1 causes
   <application>libpq</> to byte-swap the value if necessary, so that it
   is delivered as a proper <type>int</type> value for the client machine.
   When <parameter>result_is_int</> is 0, the binary-format byte string
   sent by the server is returned unmodified.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4300

4301 4302 4303 4304 4305 4306 4307
  <para>
   <function>PQfn</function> always returns a valid
   <structname>PGresult</structname> pointer. The result status should be
   checked before the result is used.   The caller is responsible for
   freeing  the  <structname>PGresult</structname>  with
   <function>PQclear</function> when it is no longer needed.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4308

4309 4310 4311 4312
  <para>
   Note that it is not possible to handle null arguments, null results,
   nor set-valued results when using this interface.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4313

4314
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4315

4316 4317
 <sect1 id="libpq-notify">
  <title>Asynchronous Notification</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4318

4319 4320 4321 4322
  <indexterm zone="libpq-notify">
   <primary>NOTIFY</primary>
   <secondary>in libpq</secondary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4323

4324 4325 4326 4327
  <para>
   <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> offers asynchronous notification
   via the <command>LISTEN</command> and <command>NOTIFY</command>
   commands.  A client session registers its interest in a particular
4328
   notification channel with the <command>LISTEN</command> command (and
4329
   can stop listening with the <command>UNLISTEN</command> command).  All
4330
   sessions listening on a particular channel will be notified
4331
   asynchronously when a <command>NOTIFY</command> command with that
4332 4333
   channel name is executed by any session. A <quote>payload</> string can
   be passed to communicate additional data to the listeners.
4334
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4335

4336 4337
  <para>
   <application>libpq</application> applications submit
4338 4339
   <command>LISTEN</command>, <command>UNLISTEN</command>,
   and <command>NOTIFY</command> commands as
4340 4341 4342 4343
   ordinary SQL commands.  The arrival of <command>NOTIFY</command>
   messages can subsequently be detected by calling
   <function>PQnotifies</function>.<indexterm><primary>PQnotifies</></>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4344

4345
  <para>
4346 4347 4348 4349 4350 4351
   The function <function>PQnotifies</function> returns the next notification
   from a list of unhandled notification messages received from the server.
   It returns a null pointer if there are no pending notifications.  Once a
   notification is returned from <function>PQnotifies</>, it is considered
   handled and will be removed from the list of notifications.

4352 4353
<synopsis>
PGnotify *PQnotifies(PGconn *conn);
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4354

4355 4356 4357 4358 4359 4360 4361
typedef struct pgNotify
{
    char *relname;              /* notification channel name */
    int  be_pid;                /* process ID of notifying server process */
    char *extra;                /* notification payload string */
} PGnotify;
</synopsis>
4362

4363 4364 4365 4366 4367
   After processing a <structname>PGnotify</structname> object returned
   by <function>PQnotifies</function>, be sure to free it with
   <function>PQfreemem</function>.  It is sufficient to free the
   <structname>PGnotify</structname> pointer; the
   <structfield>relname</structfield> and <structfield>extra</structfield>
4368 4369 4370
   fields do not represent separate allocations.  (The names of these fields
   are historical; in particular, channel names need not have anything to
   do with relation names.)
4371
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4372

4373 4374 4375 4376
  <para>
   <xref linkend="libpq-example-2"> gives a sample program that illustrates
   the use of asynchronous notification.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4377

4378 4379 4380 4381 4382 4383 4384 4385 4386 4387
  <para>
   <function>PQnotifies</function> does not actually read data from the
   server; it just returns messages previously absorbed by another
   <application>libpq</application> function.  In prior releases of
   <application>libpq</application>, the only way to ensure timely receipt
   of <command>NOTIFY</> messages was to constantly submit commands, even
   empty ones, and then check <function>PQnotifies</function> after each
   <function>PQexec</function>.  While this still works, it is deprecated
   as a waste of processing power.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4388

4389 4390 4391 4392 4393 4394 4395 4396 4397 4398 4399 4400 4401 4402 4403 4404
  <para>
   A better way to check for <command>NOTIFY</> messages when you have no
   useful commands to execute is to call
   <function>PQconsumeInput</function>, then check
   <function>PQnotifies</function>.  You can use
   <function>select()</function> to wait for data to arrive from the
   server, thereby using no <acronym>CPU</acronym> power unless there is
   something to do.  (See <function>PQsocket</function> to obtain the file
   descriptor number to use with <function>select()</function>.) Note that
   this will work OK whether you submit commands with
   <function>PQsendQuery</function>/<function>PQgetResult</function> or
   simply use <function>PQexec</function>.  You should, however, remember
   to check <function>PQnotifies</function> after each
   <function>PQgetResult</function> or <function>PQexec</function>, to
   see if any notifications came in during the processing of the command.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4405

4406
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4407

4408 4409
 <sect1 id="libpq-copy">
  <title>Functions Associated with the <command>COPY</command> Command</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4410

4411 4412 4413 4414
  <indexterm zone="libpq-copy">
   <primary>COPY</primary>
   <secondary>with libpq</secondary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4415

4416 4417 4418 4419 4420 4421 4422
  <para>
   The <command>COPY</command> command in
   <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> has options to read from or write
   to the network connection used by <application>libpq</application>.
   The functions described in this section allow applications to take
   advantage of this capability by supplying or consuming copied data.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4423

4424 4425 4426 4427 4428 4429 4430 4431 4432 4433 4434 4435 4436 4437 4438 4439 4440 4441
  <para>
   The overall process is that the application first issues the SQL
   <command>COPY</command> command via <function>PQexec</function> or one
   of the equivalent functions.  The response to this (if there is no
   error in the command) will be a <structname>PGresult</> object bearing
   a status code of <literal>PGRES_COPY_OUT</literal> or
   <literal>PGRES_COPY_IN</literal> (depending on the specified copy
   direction).  The application should then use the functions of this
   section to receive or transmit data rows.  When the data transfer is
   complete, another <structname>PGresult</> object is returned to indicate
   success or failure of the transfer.  Its status will be
   <literal>PGRES_COMMAND_OK</literal> for success or
   <literal>PGRES_FATAL_ERROR</literal> if some problem was encountered.
   At this point further SQL commands can be issued via
   <function>PQexec</function>.  (It is not possible to execute other SQL
   commands using the same connection while the <command>COPY</command>
   operation is in progress.)
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4442

4443 4444 4445 4446 4447 4448 4449 4450 4451
  <para>
   If a <command>COPY</command> command is issued via
   <function>PQexec</function> in a string that could contain additional
   commands, the application must continue fetching results via
   <function>PQgetResult</> after completing the <command>COPY</command>
   sequence.  Only when <function>PQgetResult</> returns
   <symbol>NULL</symbol> is it certain that the <function>PQexec</function>
   command string is done and it is safe to issue more commands.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4452

4453 4454 4455 4456 4457 4458
  <para>
   The functions of this section should be executed only after obtaining
   a result status of <literal>PGRES_COPY_OUT</literal> or
   <literal>PGRES_COPY_IN</literal> from <function>PQexec</function> or
   <function>PQgetResult</function>.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4459

4460 4461 4462 4463 4464
  <para>
   A <structname>PGresult</> object bearing one of these status values
   carries some additional data about the <command>COPY</command> operation
   that is starting.  This additional data is available using functions
   that are also used in connection with query results:
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4465

4466
   <variablelist>
4467
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqnfields-1">
4468 4469 4470 4471 4472 4473 4474 4475 4476 4477 4478 4479 4480 4481
     <term>
      <function>PQnfields</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQnfields</primary>
       <secondary>with COPY</secondary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the number of columns (fields) to be copied.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4482

4483
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqbinarytuples-1">
4484 4485 4486 4487 4488 4489 4490 4491 4492 4493 4494 4495 4496
     <term>
      <function>PQbinaryTuples</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQbinaryTuples</primary>
       <secondary>with COPY</secondary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       0 indicates the overall copy format is textual (rows separated by
       newlines, columns separated by separator characters, etc).  1
       indicates the overall copy format is binary.  See <xref
4497
       linkend="sql-copy"> for more information.
4498 4499 4500
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4501

4502
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfformat-1">
4503 4504 4505 4506 4507 4508 4509 4510 4511 4512 4513 4514 4515 4516 4517 4518 4519 4520 4521 4522 4523 4524
     <term>
      <function>PQfformat</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQfformat</primary>
       <secondary>with COPY</secondary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the format code (0 for text, 1 for binary) associated with
       each column of the copy operation.  The per-column format codes
       will always be zero when the overall copy format is textual, but
       the binary format can support both text and binary columns.
       (However, as of the current implementation of <command>COPY</>,
       only binary columns appear in a binary copy; so the per-column
       formats always match the overall format at present.)
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4525

4526 4527 4528 4529 4530 4531
  <note>
   <para>
    These additional data values are only available when using protocol
    3.0.  When using protocol 2.0, all these functions will return 0.
   </para>
  </note>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4532

4533 4534
  <sect2 id="libpq-copy-send">
   <title>Functions for Sending <command>COPY</command> Data</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4535

4536 4537 4538 4539 4540
   <para>
    These functions are used to send data during <literal>COPY FROM
    STDIN</>.  They will fail if called when the connection is not in
    <literal>COPY_IN</> state.
   </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4541

4542
   <variablelist>
4543
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqputcopydata">
4544 4545 4546 4547 4548 4549 4550 4551 4552 4553
     <term>
      <function>PQputCopyData</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQputCopyData</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Sends data to the server during <literal>COPY_IN</> state.
4554 4555 4556 4557 4558
<synopsis>
int PQputCopyData(PGconn *conn,
                  const char *buffer,
                  int nbytes);
</synopsis>
4559
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4560

4561 4562 4563 4564 4565 4566 4567 4568 4569 4570
      <para>
       Transmits the <command>COPY</command> data in the specified
       <parameter>buffer</>, of length <parameter>nbytes</>, to the server.
       The result is 1 if the data was sent, zero if it was not sent
       because the attempt would block (this case is only possible if the
       connection is in nonblocking mode), or -1 if an error occurred.
       (Use <function>PQerrorMessage</function> to retrieve details if
       the return value is -1.  If the value is zero, wait for write-ready
       and try again.)
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4571

4572 4573 4574 4575 4576
      <para>
       The application can divide the <command>COPY</command> data stream
       into buffer loads of any convenient size.  Buffer-load boundaries
       have no semantic significance when sending.  The contents of the
       data stream must match the data format expected by the
4577
       <command>COPY</> command; see <xref linkend="sql-copy"> for details.
4578 4579 4580
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4581

4582
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqputcopyend">
4583 4584 4585 4586 4587 4588 4589 4590 4591 4592
     <term>
      <function>PQputCopyEnd</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQputCopyEnd</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Sends end-of-data indication to the server during <literal>COPY_IN</> state.
4593 4594 4595 4596
<synopsis>
int PQputCopyEnd(PGconn *conn,
                 const char *errormsg);
</synopsis>
4597
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4598

4599 4600 4601 4602 4603 4604 4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610
      <para>
       Ends the <literal>COPY_IN</> operation successfully if
       <parameter>errormsg</> is <symbol>NULL</symbol>.  If
       <parameter>errormsg</> is not <symbol>NULL</symbol> then the
       <command>COPY</> is forced to fail, with the string pointed to by
       <parameter>errormsg</> used as the error message.  (One should not
       assume that this exact error message will come back from the server,
       however, as the server might have already failed the
       <command>COPY</> for its own reasons.  Also note that the option
       to force failure does not work when using pre-3.0-protocol
       connections.)
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4611

4612 4613 4614 4615 4616 4617 4618 4619
      <para>
       The result is 1 if the termination data was sent, zero if it was
       not sent because the attempt would block (this case is only possible
       if the connection is in nonblocking mode), or -1 if an error
       occurred.  (Use <function>PQerrorMessage</function> to retrieve
       details if the return value is -1.  If the value is zero, wait for
       write-ready and try again.)
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4620

4621 4622 4623 4624 4625 4626 4627 4628 4629
      <para>
       After successfully calling <function>PQputCopyEnd</>, call
       <function>PQgetResult</> to obtain the final result status of the
       <command>COPY</> command.  One can wait for this result to be
       available in the usual way.  Then return to normal operation.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4630

4631
  </sect2>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4632

4633 4634
  <sect2 id="libpq-copy-receive">
   <title>Functions for Receiving <command>COPY</command> Data</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4635

4636 4637 4638 4639 4640
   <para>
    These functions are used to receive data during <literal>COPY TO
    STDOUT</>.  They will fail if called when the connection is not in
    <literal>COPY_OUT</> state.
   </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4641

4642
   <variablelist>
4643
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetcopydata">
4644 4645 4646 4647 4648 4649 4650 4651 4652 4653
     <term>
      <function>PQgetCopyData</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQgetCopyData</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Receives data from the server during <literal>COPY_OUT</> state.
4654 4655 4656 4657 4658
<synopsis>
int PQgetCopyData(PGconn *conn,
                  char **buffer,
                  int async);
</synopsis>
4659
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4660

4661 4662 4663 4664 4665 4666 4667 4668 4669
      <para>
       Attempts to obtain another row of data from the server during a
       <command>COPY</command>.  Data is always returned one data row at
       a time; if only a partial row is available, it is not returned.
       Successful return of a data row involves allocating a chunk of
       memory to hold the data.  The <parameter>buffer</> parameter must
       be non-<symbol>NULL</symbol>.  <parameter>*buffer</> is set to
       point to the allocated memory, or to <symbol>NULL</symbol> in cases
       where no buffer is returned.  A non-<symbol>NULL</symbol> result
4670
       buffer should be freed using <function>PQfreemem</> when no longer
4671 4672
       needed.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4673

4674 4675 4676 4677 4678 4679 4680 4681 4682 4683 4684
      <para>
       When a row is successfully returned, the return value is the number
       of data bytes in the row (this will always be greater than zero).
       The returned string is always null-terminated, though this is
       probably only useful for textual <command>COPY</command>.  A result
       of zero indicates that the <command>COPY</command> is still in
       progress, but no row is yet available (this is only possible when
       <parameter>async</> is true).  A result of -1 indicates that the
       <command>COPY</command> is done.  A result of -2 indicates that an
       error occurred (consult <function>PQerrorMessage</> for the reason).
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4685

4686 4687 4688 4689 4690 4691 4692 4693 4694 4695
      <para>
       When <parameter>async</> is true (not zero),
       <function>PQgetCopyData</> will not block waiting for input; it
       will return zero if the <command>COPY</command> is still in progress
       but no complete row is available.  (In this case wait for read-ready
       and then call <function>PQconsumeInput</> before calling
       <function>PQgetCopyData</> again.)  When <parameter>async</> is
       false (zero), <function>PQgetCopyData</> will block until data is
       available or the operation completes.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4696

4697 4698 4699 4700 4701 4702 4703 4704 4705
      <para>
       After <function>PQgetCopyData</> returns -1, call
       <function>PQgetResult</> to obtain the final result status of the
       <command>COPY</> command.  One can wait for this result to be
       available in the usual way.  Then return to normal operation.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4706

4707
  </sect2>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4708

4709 4710
  <sect2 id="libpq-copy-deprecated">
   <title>Obsolete Functions for <command>COPY</command></title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4711

4712 4713 4714 4715 4716 4717
   <para>
    These functions represent older methods of handling <command>COPY</>.
    Although they still work, they are deprecated due to poor error handling,
    inconvenient methods of detecting end-of-data, and lack of support for binary
    or nonblocking transfers.
   </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4718

4719
   <variablelist>
4720
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetline">
4721 4722 4723 4724 4725 4726 4727 4728 4729 4730 4731
     <term>
      <function>PQgetline</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQgetline</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Reads  a  newline-terminated  line  of  characters (transmitted
       by the server) into a buffer string of size <parameter>length</>.
4732 4733 4734 4735 4736
<synopsis>
int PQgetline(PGconn *conn,
              char *buffer,
              int length);
</synopsis>
4737
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4738

4739 4740 4741 4742 4743 4744 4745 4746 4747 4748 4749 4750 4751 4752 4753 4754 4755 4756 4757
      <para>
       This function copies up to <parameter>length</>-1 characters into
       the buffer and converts the terminating newline into a zero byte.
       <function>PQgetline</function> returns <symbol>EOF</symbol> at the
       end of input, 0 if the entire line has been read, and 1 if the
       buffer is full but the terminating newline has not yet been read.
       </para>
       <para>
       Note that the application must check to see if a new line consists
       of  the  two characters  <literal>\.</literal>, which  indicates
       that the server has finished sending the results  of  the
       <command>COPY</command> command.  If  the  application might receive
       lines that are more than <parameter>length</>-1  characters  long,
       care is needed to be sure it recognizes the <literal>\.</literal>
       line correctly (and does not, for example, mistake the end of a
       long data line for a terminator line).
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4758

4759
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetlineasync">
4760 4761 4762 4763 4764 4765 4766 4767 4768 4769 4770
     <term>
      <function>PQgetlineAsync</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQgetlineAsync</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Reads a row of <command>COPY</command> data (transmitted  by the
       server) into a buffer without blocking.
4771 4772 4773 4774 4775
<synopsis>
int PQgetlineAsync(PGconn *conn,
                   char *buffer,
                   int bufsize);
</synopsis>
4776
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4777

4778 4779 4780 4781 4782 4783 4784 4785 4786 4787 4788 4789 4790 4791 4792 4793 4794 4795 4796 4797 4798 4799 4800 4801 4802 4803 4804 4805 4806 4807 4808 4809 4810 4811 4812 4813 4814 4815 4816
      <para>
       This function is similar to <function>PQgetline</function>, but it can be used
       by applications
       that must read <command>COPY</command> data asynchronously, that is, without blocking.
       Having issued the <command>COPY</command> command and gotten a <literal>PGRES_COPY_OUT</literal>
       response, the
       application should call <function>PQconsumeInput</function> and
       <function>PQgetlineAsync</function> until the
       end-of-data signal is detected.
       </para>
       <para>
       Unlike <function>PQgetline</function>, this function takes
       responsibility for detecting end-of-data.
      </para>

      <para>
       On each call, <function>PQgetlineAsync</function> will return data if a
       complete data row is available in <application>libpq</>'s input buffer.
       Otherwise, no data is returned until the rest of the row arrives.
       The function returns -1 if the end-of-copy-data marker has been recognized,
       or 0 if no data is available, or a positive number giving the number of
       bytes of data returned.  If -1 is returned, the caller must next call
       <function>PQendcopy</function>, and then return to normal processing.
      </para>

      <para>
       The data returned will not extend beyond a data-row boundary.  If possible
       a whole row will be returned at one time.  But if the buffer offered by
       the caller is too small to hold a row sent by the server, then a partial
       data row will be returned.  With textual data this can be detected by testing
       whether the last returned byte is <literal>\n</literal> or not.  (In a binary
       <command>COPY</>, actual parsing of the <command>COPY</> data format will be needed to make the
       equivalent determination.)
       The returned string is not null-terminated.  (If you want to add a
       terminating null, be sure to pass a <parameter>bufsize</parameter> one smaller
       than the room actually available.)
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4817

4818
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqputline">
4819 4820 4821 4822 4823 4824 4825 4826 4827 4828 4829
     <term>
      <function>PQputline</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQputline</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Sends  a  null-terminated  string  to  the server.  Returns 0 if
       OK and <symbol>EOF</symbol> if unable to send the string.
4830 4831 4832 4833
<synopsis>
int PQputline(PGconn *conn,
              const char *string);
</synopsis>
4834
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4835

4836 4837 4838 4839 4840 4841 4842 4843
      <para>
       The <command>COPY</command> data stream sent by a series of calls
       to <function>PQputline</function> has the same format as that
       returned by <function>PQgetlineAsync</function>, except that
       applications are not obliged to send exactly one data row per
       <function>PQputline</function> call; it is okay to send a partial
       line or multiple lines per call.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4844

4845 4846 4847 4848 4849 4850 4851 4852 4853 4854 4855 4856 4857
      <note>
       <para>
        Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> protocol 3.0, it was necessary
        for the application to explicitly send the two characters
        <literal>\.</literal> as a final line to indicate to the server that it had
        finished sending <command>COPY</> data.  While this still works, it is deprecated and the
        special meaning of <literal>\.</literal> can be expected to be removed in a
        future release.  It is sufficient to call <function>PQendcopy</function> after
        having sent the actual data.
       </para>
      </note>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4858

4859
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqputnbytes">
4860 4861 4862 4863 4864 4865
     <term>
      <function>PQputnbytes</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQputnbytes</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
4866

4867 4868 4869 4870
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Sends  a  non-null-terminated  string  to  the server.  Returns
       0 if OK and <symbol>EOF</symbol> if unable to send the string.
4871 4872 4873 4874 4875
<synopsis>
int PQputnbytes(PGconn *conn,
                const char *buffer,
                int nbytes);
</synopsis>
4876
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4877

4878 4879 4880 4881 4882 4883 4884
      <para>
       This is exactly like <function>PQputline</function>, except that the data
       buffer need not be null-terminated since the number of bytes to send is
       specified directly.  Use this procedure when sending binary data.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4885

4886
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqendcopy">
4887 4888 4889 4890 4891 4892 4893 4894 4895 4896
     <term>
      <function>PQendcopy</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQendcopy</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Synchronizes with the server.
4897 4898 4899
<synopsis>
int PQendcopy(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
4900 4901 4902 4903 4904 4905 4906 4907 4908 4909 4910
       This function waits until the  server  has  finished  the copying.
       It should either be issued when the  last  string  has  been sent
       to  the  server using <function>PQputline</function> or when the
       last string has been  received  from  the  server using
       <function>PGgetline</function>.  It must be issued or the server
       will get <quote>out of sync</quote> with  the client.   Upon return
       from this function, the server is ready to receive the next SQL
       command.  The return value is 0  on  successful  completion,
       nonzero otherwise.  (Use <function>PQerrorMessage</function> to
       retrieve details if the return value is nonzero.)
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4911

4912 4913 4914 4915 4916 4917 4918 4919 4920 4921 4922 4923 4924 4925
      <para>
       When using <function>PQgetResult</function>, the application should
       respond to a <literal>PGRES_COPY_OUT</literal> result by executing
       <function>PQgetline</function> repeatedly, followed by
       <function>PQendcopy</function> after the terminator line is seen.
       It should then return to the <function>PQgetResult</function> loop
       until <function>PQgetResult</function> returns a null pointer.
       Similarly a <literal>PGRES_COPY_IN</literal> result is processed
       by a series of <function>PQputline</function> calls followed by
       <function>PQendcopy</function>, then return to the
       <function>PQgetResult</function> loop.  This arrangement will
       ensure that a <command>COPY</command> command embedded in a series
       of <acronym>SQL</acronym> commands will be executed correctly.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4926

4927 4928 4929 4930 4931 4932 4933 4934 4935 4936
      <para>
       Older applications are likely to submit a <command>COPY</command>
       via <function>PQexec</function> and assume that the transaction
       is done after <function>PQendcopy</function>.  This will work
       correctly only if the <command>COPY</command> is the only
       <acronym>SQL</acronym> command in the command string.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4937

4938
  </sect2>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4939

4940
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4941

4942 4943
 <sect1 id="libpq-control">
  <title>Control Functions</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4944

4945 4946 4947 4948
  <para>
   These functions control miscellaneous details of <application>libpq</>'s
   behavior.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4949

4950
  <variablelist>
4951
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqclientencoding">
4952 4953 4954 4955 4956 4957 4958 4959 4960 4961
    <term>
     <function>PQclientEncoding</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQclientEncoding</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Returns the client encoding.
4962 4963 4964
<synopsis>
int PQclientEncoding(const PGconn *<replaceable>conn</replaceable>);
</synopsis>
4965 4966 4967 4968 4969 4970 4971 4972 4973 4974 4975 4976

      Note that it returns the encoding ID, not a symbolic string
      such as <literal>EUC_JP</literal>. To convert an encoding ID to an encoding name, you
      can use:

<synopsis>
char *pg_encoding_to_char(int <replaceable>encoding_id</replaceable>);
</synopsis>
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

4977
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsetclientencoding">
4978 4979 4980 4981 4982 4983 4984 4985 4986 4987
    <term>
     <function>PQsetClientEncoding</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQsetClientEncoding</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Sets the client encoding.
4988 4989 4990
<synopsis>
int PQsetClientEncoding(PGconn *<replaceable>conn</replaceable>, const char *<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>);
</synopsis>
4991 4992 4993 4994 4995 4996 4997 4998 4999 5000

      <replaceable>conn</replaceable> is a connection to the server,
      and <replaceable>encoding</replaceable> is the encoding you want to
      use. If the function successfully sets the encoding, it returns 0,
      otherwise -1. The current encoding for this connection can be
      determined by using <function>PQclientEncoding</>.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5001
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqseterrorverbosity">
5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008
    <term>
     <function>PQsetErrorVerbosity</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQsetErrorVerbosity</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5009 5010 5011 5012
    <listitem>
     <para>
      Determines the verbosity of messages returned by
      <function>PQerrorMessage</> and <function>PQresultErrorMessage</>.
5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019
<synopsis>
typedef enum
{
    PQERRORS_TERSE,
    PQERRORS_DEFAULT,
    PQERRORS_VERBOSE
} PGVerbosity;
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5020

5021 5022
PGVerbosity PQsetErrorVerbosity(PGconn *conn, PGVerbosity verbosity);
</synopsis>
5023

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5024 5025 5026 5027 5028 5029 5030 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035
      <function>PQsetErrorVerbosity</> sets the verbosity mode, returning
      the connection's previous setting.  In <firstterm>TERSE</> mode,
      returned messages include severity, primary text, and position only;
      this will normally fit on a single line.  The default mode produces
      messages that include the above plus any detail, hint, or context
      fields (these might span multiple lines).  The <firstterm>VERBOSE</>
      mode includes all available fields.  Changing the verbosity does not
      affect the messages available from already-existing
      <structname>PGresult</> objects, only subsequently-created ones.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5036

5037
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqtrace">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5038 5039 5040 5041 5042 5043
    <term>
     <function>PQtrace</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQtrace</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5044

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5045
    <listitem>
5046
     <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5047
      Enables  tracing of the client/server communication to a debugging file stream.
5048 5049 5050
<synopsis>
void PQtrace(PGconn *conn, FILE *stream);
</synopsis>
5051
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5052

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5053 5054 5055 5056 5057 5058 5059 5060 5061 5062
     <note>
      <para>
       On Windows, if the <application>libpq</> library and an application are
       compiled with different flags, this function call will crash the
       application because the internal representation of the <literal>FILE</>
       pointers differ.  Specifically, multithreaded/single-threaded,
       release/debug, and static/dynamic flags should be the same for the
       library and all applications using that library.
      </para>
     </note>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5063

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5064 5065
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5066

5067
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pquntrace">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5068 5069 5070 5071 5072 5073
    <term>
     <function>PQuntrace</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQuntrace</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5074

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5075 5076 5077
    <listitem>
     <para>
      Disables tracing started by <function>PQtrace</function>.
5078 5079 5080
<synopsis>
void PQuntrace(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5081 5082 5083 5084
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>
  </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5085

5086
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5087

5088 5089
 <sect1 id="libpq-misc">
  <title>Miscellaneous Functions</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5090

5091 5092 5093
  <para>
   As always, there are some functions that just don't fit anywhere.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5094

5095
  <variablelist>
5096
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfreemem">
5097 5098 5099 5100 5101 5102 5103 5104 5105 5106
    <term>
     <function>PQfreemem</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQfreemem</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Frees memory allocated by <application>libpq</>.
5107 5108 5109
<synopsis>
void PQfreemem(void *ptr);
</synopsis>
5110 5111 5112 5113 5114 5115 5116 5117 5118 5119 5120 5121 5122 5123 5124 5125 5126 5127 5128
     </para>

     <para>
      Frees memory allocated by <application>libpq</>, particularly
      <function>PQescapeByteaConn</function>,
      <function>PQescapeBytea</function>,
      <function>PQunescapeBytea</function>,
      and <function>PQnotifies</function>.
      It is particularly important that this function, rather than
      <function>free()</>, be used on Microsoft Windows.  This is because
      allocating memory in a DLL and releasing it in the application works
      only if multithreaded/single-threaded, release/debug, and static/dynamic
      flags are the same for the DLL and the application.  On non-Microsoft
      Windows platforms, this function is the same as the standard library
      function <function>free()</>.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5129
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconninfofree">
5130 5131 5132 5133 5134 5135 5136 5137 5138 5139 5140
    <term>
     <function>PQconninfoFree</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQconninfoFree</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Frees the data structures allocated by
      <function>PQconndefaults</> or <function>PQconninfoParse</>.
5141 5142 5143
<synopsis>
void PQconninfoFree(PQconninfoOption *connOptions);
</synopsis>
5144 5145 5146 5147 5148 5149 5150 5151 5152
     </para>

     <para>
      A simple <function>PQfreemem</function> will not do for this, since
      the array contains references to subsidiary strings.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5153
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqencryptpassword">
5154 5155 5156 5157 5158 5159 5160 5161 5162 5163
    <term>
     <function>PQencryptPassword</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQencryptPassword</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Prepares the encrypted form of a <productname>PostgreSQL</> password.
5164 5165 5166
<synopsis>
char * PQencryptPassword(const char *passwd, const char *user);
</synopsis>
5167 5168 5169 5170 5171 5172 5173 5174 5175 5176 5177 5178 5179 5180 5181
      This function is intended to be used by client applications that
      wish to send commands like <literal>ALTER USER joe PASSWORD
      'pwd'</>.  It is good practice not to send the original cleartext
      password in such a command, because it might be exposed in command
      logs, activity displays, and so on.  Instead, use this function to
      convert the password to encrypted form before it is sent.  The
      arguments are the cleartext password, and the SQL name of the user
      it is for.  The return value is a string allocated by
      <function>malloc</function>, or <symbol>NULL</symbol> if out of
      memory.  The caller can assume the string doesn't contain any
      special characters that would require escaping.  Use
      <function>PQfreemem</> to free the result when done with it.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>
5182

5183
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqmakeemptypgresult">
5184 5185 5186 5187 5188 5189 5190 5191 5192 5193
    <term>
     <function>PQmakeEmptyPGresult</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQmakeEmptyPGresult</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Constructs an empty <structname>PGresult</structname> object with the given status.
5194 5195 5196
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQmakeEmptyPGresult(PGconn *conn, ExecStatusType status);
</synopsis>
5197 5198 5199 5200 5201
     </para>

     <para>
      This is <application>libpq</>'s internal function to allocate and
      initialize an empty <structname>PGresult</structname> object.  This
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5202
      function returns <symbol>NULL</> if memory could not be allocated. It is
5203 5204 5205 5206 5207
      exported because some applications find it useful to generate result
      objects (particularly objects with error status) themselves.  If
      <parameter>conn</parameter> is not null and <parameter>status</>
      indicates an error, the current error message of the specified
      connection is copied into the <structname>PGresult</structname>.
5208
      Also, if <parameter>conn</parameter> is not null, any event procedures
5209
      registered in the connection are copied into the
5210 5211 5212
      <structname>PGresult</structname>.  (They do not get
      <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCREATE</> calls, but see
      <function>PQfireResultCreateEvents</function>.)
5213 5214 5215 5216 5217 5218 5219
      Note that <function>PQclear</function> should eventually be called
      on the object, just as with a <structname>PGresult</structname>
      returned by <application>libpq</application> itself.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5220
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfireresultcreateevents">
5221 5222 5223 5224 5225 5226 5227 5228 5229 5230 5231 5232 5233
    <term>
     <function>PQfireResultCreateEvents</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQfireResultCreateEvents</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>
    <listitem>
     <para>
      Fires a <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCREATE</literal> event (see <xref
      linkend="libpq-events">) for each event procedure registered in the
      <structname>PGresult</structname> object.  Returns non-zero for success,
      zero if any event procedure fails.

5234 5235 5236
<synopsis>
int PQfireResultCreateEvents(PGconn *conn, PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
5237 5238 5239 5240
     </para>

     <para>
      The <literal>conn</> argument is passed through to event procedures
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5241
      but not used directly.  It can be <symbol>NULL</> if the event
5242 5243 5244 5245 5246 5247 5248 5249 5250 5251 5252 5253 5254 5255 5256 5257 5258 5259
      procedures won't use it.
     </para>

     <para>
      Event procedures that have already received a
      <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCREATE</> or <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCOPY</> event
      for this object are not fired again.
     </para>

     <para>
      The main reason that this function is separate from
      <function>PQmakeEmptyPGResult</function> is that it is often appropriate
      to create a <structname>PGresult</structname> and fill it with data
      before invoking the event procedures.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5260
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqcopyresult">
5261 5262 5263 5264 5265 5266 5267 5268 5269 5270 5271 5272
    <term>
     <function>PQcopyResult</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQcopyResult</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Makes a copy of a <structname>PGresult</structname> object.  The copy is
      not linked to the source result in any way and
      <function>PQclear</function> must be called when the copy is no longer
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5273
      needed.  If the function fails, <symbol>NULL</> is returned.
5274

5275 5276 5277
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQcopyResult(const PGresult *src, int flags);
</synopsis>
5278 5279 5280 5281 5282 5283 5284 5285 5286 5287 5288 5289 5290 5291 5292 5293 5294 5295 5296 5297 5298
     </para>

     <para>
      This is not intended to make an exact copy.  The returned result is
      always put into <literal>PGRES_TUPLES_OK</literal> status, and does not
      copy any error message in the source.  (It does copy the command status
      string, however.)  The <parameter>flags</parameter> argument determines
      what else is copied.  It is a bitwise OR of several flags.
      <literal>PG_COPYRES_ATTRS</literal> specifies copying the source
      result's attributes (column definitions).
      <literal>PG_COPYRES_TUPLES</literal> specifies copying the source
      result's tuples.  (This implies copying the attributes, too.)
      <literal>PG_COPYRES_NOTICEHOOKS</literal> specifies
      copying the source result's notify hooks.
      <literal>PG_COPYRES_EVENTS</literal> specifies copying the source
      result's events.  (But any instance data associated with the source
      is not copied.)
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5299
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsetresultattrs">
5300 5301 5302 5303 5304 5305 5306 5307 5308 5309
    <term>
     <function>PQsetResultAttrs</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQsetResultAttrs</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Sets the attributes of a <structname>PGresult</structname> object.
5310 5311 5312
<synopsis>
int PQsetResultAttrs(PGresult *res, int numAttributes, PGresAttDesc *attDescs);
</synopsis>
5313 5314 5315 5316
     </para>

     <para>
      The provided <parameter>attDescs</parameter> are copied into the result.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5317
      If the <parameter>attDescs</parameter> pointer is <symbol>NULL</> or
5318 5319 5320 5321 5322 5323 5324 5325 5326
      <parameter>numAttributes</parameter> is less than one, the request is
      ignored and the function succeeds.  If <parameter>res</parameter>
      already contains attributes, the function will fail.  If the function
      fails, the return value is zero.  If the function succeeds, the return
      value is non-zero.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5327
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsetvalue">
5328 5329 5330 5331 5332 5333 5334 5335 5336 5337
    <term>
     <function>PQsetvalue</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQsetvalue</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Sets a tuple field value of a <structname>PGresult</structname> object.
5338 5339 5340
<synopsis>
int PQsetvalue(PGresult *res, int tup_num, int field_num, char *value, int len);
</synopsis>
5341 5342 5343 5344 5345 5346 5347 5348 5349
     </para>

     <para>
      The function will automatically grow the result's internal tuples array
      as needed.  However, the <parameter>tup_num</parameter> argument must be
      less than or equal to <function>PQntuples</function>, meaning this
      function can only grow the tuples array one tuple at a time.  But any
      field of any existing tuple can be modified in any order.  If a value at
      <parameter>field_num</parameter> already exists, it will be overwritten.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5350
      If <parameter>len</parameter> is -1 or
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5351 5352
      <parameter>value</parameter> is <symbol>NULL</>, the field value
      will be set to an SQL null value.  The
5353 5354 5355 5356 5357 5358 5359 5360
      <parameter>value</parameter> is copied into the result's private storage,
      thus is no longer needed after the function
      returns.  If the function fails, the return value is zero.  If the
      function succeeds, the return value is non-zero.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5361
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqresultalloc">
5362 5363 5364 5365 5366 5367 5368 5369 5370 5371
    <term>
     <function>PQresultAlloc</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQresultAlloc</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Allocate subsidiary storage for a <structname>PGresult</structname> object.
5372 5373 5374
<synopsis>
void *PQresultAlloc(PGresult *res, size_t nBytes);
</synopsis>
5375 5376 5377 5378 5379
     </para>

     <para>
      Any memory allocated with this function will be freed when
      <parameter>res</parameter> is cleared.  If the function fails,
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5380
      the return value is <symbol>NULL</>.  The result is
5381 5382 5383 5384 5385 5386
      guaranteed to be adequately aligned for any type of data,
      just as for <function>malloc</>.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5387 5388 5389 5390 5391 5392 5393 5394 5395 5396 5397 5398 5399 5400 5401 5402 5403 5404 5405 5406 5407 5408 5409 5410 5411 5412 5413 5414 5415 5416 5417 5418 5419 5420 5421 5422 5423 5424 5425 5426 5427 5428 5429 5430
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqlibversion">
    <term>
     <function>PQlibVersion</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQlibVersion</primary>
      <seealso>PQserverVersion</seealso>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Return the version of <productname>libpq</> that is being used.
<synopsis>
int PQlibVersion(void);
</synopsis>
     </para>

     <para>
      The result of this function can be used to determine, at
      runtime, if specific functionality is available in the currently
      loaded version of libpq. The function can be used, for example,
      to determine which connection options are available for
      <function>PQconnectdb</> or if the <literal>hex</> <type>bytea</>
      output added in PostgreSQL 9.0 is supported.
     </para>

     <para>
      The number is formed by converting the major, minor, and revision
      numbers into two-decimal-digit numbers and appending them together.
      For example, version 9.1 will be returned as 90100, and version
      9.1.2 will be returned as 90102 (leading zeroes are not shown).
     </para>

     <note>
      <para>
       This function appeared in <productname>PostgreSQL</> version 9.1, so
       it cannot be used to detect required functionality in earlier
       versions, since linking to it will create a link dependency
       on version 9.1.
      </para>
     </note>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5431
  </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5432

5433
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5434

5435 5436
 <sect1 id="libpq-notice-processing">
  <title>Notice Processing</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5437

5438 5439 5440 5441
  <indexterm zone="libpq-notice-processing">
   <primary>notice processing</primary>
   <secondary>in libpq</secondary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5442

5443 5444 5445 5446 5447 5448 5449 5450 5451
  <para>
   Notice and warning messages generated by the server are not returned
   by the query execution functions, since they do not imply failure of
   the query.  Instead they are passed to a notice handling function, and
   execution continues normally after the handler returns.  The default
   notice handling function prints the message on
   <filename>stderr</filename>, but the application can override this
   behavior by supplying its own handling function.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5452

5453 5454 5455 5456 5457 5458 5459 5460
  <para>
   For historical reasons, there are two levels of notice handling, called
   the notice receiver and notice processor.  The default behavior is for
   the notice receiver to format the notice and pass a string to the notice
   processor for printing.  However, an application that chooses to provide
   its own notice receiver will typically ignore the notice processor
   layer and just do all the work in the notice receiver.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5461

5462 5463
  <para>
   The function <function>PQsetNoticeReceiver</function>
5464 5465
   <indexterm><primary>notice receiver</></>
   <indexterm><primary>PQsetNoticeReceiver</></> sets or
5466 5467
   examines the current notice receiver for a connection object.
   Similarly, <function>PQsetNoticeProcessor</function>
5468 5469
   <indexterm><primary>notice processor</></>
   <indexterm><primary>PQsetNoticeProcessor</></> sets or
5470
   examines the current notice processor.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5471

5472 5473
<synopsis>
typedef void (*PQnoticeReceiver) (void *arg, const PGresult *res);
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5474

5475 5476 5477 5478
PQnoticeReceiver
PQsetNoticeReceiver(PGconn *conn,
                    PQnoticeReceiver proc,
                    void *arg);
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5479

5480
typedef void (*PQnoticeProcessor) (void *arg, const char *message);
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5481

5482 5483 5484 5485 5486
PQnoticeProcessor
PQsetNoticeProcessor(PGconn *conn,
                     PQnoticeProcessor proc,
                     void *arg);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5487

5488 5489 5490 5491 5492
   Each of these functions returns the previous notice receiver or
   processor function pointer, and sets the new value.  If you supply a
   null function pointer, no action is taken, but the current pointer is
   returned.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5493

5494 5495 5496 5497 5498 5499 5500 5501 5502 5503 5504 5505
  <para>
   When a notice or warning message is received from the server, or
   generated internally by <application>libpq</application>, the notice
   receiver function is called.  It is passed the message in the form of
   a <symbol>PGRES_NONFATAL_ERROR</symbol>
   <structname>PGresult</structname>.  (This allows the receiver to extract
   individual fields using <function>PQresultErrorField</>, or the complete
   preformatted message using <function>PQresultErrorMessage</>.) The same
   void pointer passed to <function>PQsetNoticeReceiver</function> is also
   passed.  (This pointer can be used to access application-specific state
   if needed.)
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5506

5507 5508 5509 5510 5511
  <para>
   The default notice receiver simply extracts the message (using
   <function>PQresultErrorMessage</>) and passes it to the notice
   processor.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5512

5513 5514 5515 5516 5517 5518 5519
  <para>
   The notice processor is responsible for handling a notice or warning
   message given in text form.  It is passed the string text of the message
   (including a trailing newline), plus a void pointer that is the same
   one passed to <function>PQsetNoticeProcessor</function>.  (This pointer
   can be used to access application-specific state if needed.)
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5520

5521 5522
  <para>
   The default notice processor is simply:
5523
<programlisting>
5524 5525 5526 5527 5528 5529 5530
static void
defaultNoticeProcessor(void *arg, const char *message)
{
    fprintf(stderr, "%s", message);
}
</programlisting>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5531

5532 5533 5534 5535 5536 5537 5538 5539 5540
  <para>
   Once you have set a notice receiver or processor, you should expect
   that that function could be called as long as either the
   <structname>PGconn</> object or <structname>PGresult</> objects made
   from it exist.  At creation of a <structname>PGresult</>, the
   <structname>PGconn</>'s current notice handling pointers are copied
   into the <structname>PGresult</> for possible use by functions like
   <function>PQgetvalue</function>.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5541

5542
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5543

5544 5545 5546 5547 5548 5549 5550 5551 5552 5553 5554 5555 5556 5557 5558 5559 5560 5561 5562 5563 5564 5565 5566
 <sect1 id="libpq-events">
  <title>Event System</title>

  <para>
   <application>libpq</application>'s event system is designed to notify
   registered event handlers about interesting
   <application>libpq</application> events, such as the creation or
   destruction of <structname>PGconn</structname> and
   <structname>PGresult</structname> objects.  A principal use case is that
   this allows applications to associate their own data with a
   <structname>PGconn</structname> or <structname>PGresult</structname>
   and ensure that that data is freed at an appropriate time.
  </para>

  <para>
   Each registered event handler is associated with two pieces of data,
   known to <application>libpq</application> only as opaque <literal>void *</>
   pointers.  There is a <firstterm>passthrough</> pointer that is provided
   by the application when the event handler is registered with a
   <structname>PGconn</>.  The passthrough pointer never changes for the
   life of the <structname>PGconn</> and all <structname>PGresult</>s
   generated from it; so if used, it must point to long-lived data.
   In addition there is an <firstterm>instance data</> pointer, which starts
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5567
   out <symbol>NULL</> in every <structname>PGconn</> and <structname>PGresult</>.
5568 5569 5570 5571 5572 5573 5574 5575 5576 5577 5578 5579 5580 5581 5582 5583 5584 5585 5586 5587 5588 5589 5590 5591
   This pointer can be manipulated using the
   <function>PQinstanceData</function>,
   <function>PQsetInstanceData</function>,
   <function>PQresultInstanceData</function> and
   <function>PQsetResultInstanceData</function> functions.  Note that
   unlike the passthrough pointer, instance data of a <structname>PGconn</>
   is not automatically inherited by <structname>PGresult</>s created from
   it.  <application>libpq</application> does not know what passthrough
   and instance data pointers point to (if anything) and will never attempt
   to free them &mdash; that is the responsibility of the event handler.
  </para>

  <sect2 id="libpq-events-types">
   <title>Event Types</title>

   <para>
    The enum <literal>PGEventId</> names the types of events handled by
    the event system.  All its values have names beginning with
    <literal>PGEVT</literal>.  For each event type, there is a corresponding
    event info structure that carries the parameters passed to the event
    handlers.  The event types are:
   </para>

   <variablelist>
5592
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pgevt-register">
5593 5594 5595 5596 5597 5598 5599 5600 5601
     <term><literal>PGEVT_REGISTER</literal></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       The register event occurs when <function>PQregisterEventProc</function>
       is called.  It is the ideal time to initialize any
       <literal>instanceData</literal> an event procedure may need.  Only one
       register event will be fired per event handler per connection.  If the
       event procedure fails, the registration is aborted.

5602
<synopsis>
5603 5604
typedef struct
{
5605
    PGconn *conn;
5606
} PGEventRegister;
5607
</synopsis>
5608 5609 5610 5611 5612 5613 5614

       When a <literal>PGEVT_REGISTER</literal> event is received, the
       <parameter>evtInfo</parameter> pointer should be cast to a
       <structname>PGEventRegister *</structname>.  This structure contains a
       <structname>PGconn</structname> that should be in the
       <literal>CONNECTION_OK</literal> status; guaranteed if one calls
       <function>PQregisterEventProc</function> right after obtaining a good
5615 5616 5617
       <structname>PGconn</structname>.  When returning a failure code, all
       cleanup must be performed as no <literal>PGEVT_CONNDESTROY</literal>
       event will be sent.
5618 5619 5620 5621
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5622
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pgevt-connreset">
5623 5624 5625 5626 5627 5628 5629 5630 5631 5632 5633 5634
     <term><literal>PGEVT_CONNRESET</literal></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       The connection reset event is fired on completion of
       <function>PQreset</function> or <function>PQresetPoll</function>.  In
       both cases, the event is only fired if the reset was successful.  If
       the event procedure fails, the entire connection reset will fail; the
       <structname>PGconn</structname> is put into
       <literal>CONNECTION_BAD</literal> status and
       <function>PQresetPoll</function> will return
       <literal>PGRES_POLLING_FAILED</literal>.

5635
<synopsis>
5636 5637
typedef struct
{
5638
    PGconn *conn;
5639
} PGEventConnReset;
5640
</synopsis>
5641 5642 5643 5644 5645 5646

       When a <literal>PGEVT_CONNRESET</literal> event is received, the
       <parameter>evtInfo</parameter> pointer should be cast to a
       <structname>PGEventConnReset *</structname>.  Although the contained
       <structname>PGconn</structname> was just reset, all event data remains
       unchanged.  This event should be used to reset/reload/requery any
5647 5648 5649 5650
       associated <literal>instanceData</literal>.  Note that even if the
       event procedure fails to process <literal>PGEVT_CONNRESET</>, it will
       still receive a <literal>PGEVT_CONNDESTROY</> event when the connection
       is closed.
5651 5652 5653 5654
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5655
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pgevt-conndestroy">
5656 5657 5658 5659 5660 5661 5662 5663 5664
     <term><literal>PGEVT_CONNDESTROY</literal></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       The connection destroy event is fired in response to
       <function>PQfinish</function>.  It is the event procedure's
       responsibility to properly clean up its event data as libpq has no
       ability to manage this memory.  Failure to clean up will lead
       to memory leaks.

5665
<synopsis>
5666 5667
typedef struct
{
5668
    PGconn *conn;
5669
} PGEventConnDestroy;
5670
</synopsis>
5671 5672 5673 5674 5675 5676 5677 5678 5679 5680 5681 5682 5683

       When a <literal>PGEVT_CONNDESTROY</literal> event is received, the
       <parameter>evtInfo</parameter> pointer should be cast to a
       <structname>PGEventConnDestroy *</structname>.  This event is fired
       prior to <function>PQfinish</function> performing any other cleanup.
       The return value of the event procedure is ignored since there is no
       way of indicating a failure from <function>PQfinish</function>.  Also,
       an event procedure failure should not abort the process of cleaning up
       unwanted memory.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5684
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pgevt-resultcreate">
5685 5686 5687 5688 5689 5690 5691 5692
     <term><literal>PGEVT_RESULTCREATE</literal></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       The result creation event is fired in response to any query execution
       function that generates a result, including
       <function>PQgetResult</function>.  This event will only be fired after
       the result has been created successfully.

5693
<synopsis>
5694 5695
typedef struct
{
5696
    PGconn *conn;
5697 5698
    PGresult *result;
} PGEventResultCreate;
5699
</synopsis>
5700 5701 5702 5703 5704 5705 5706 5707 5708

       When a <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCREATE</literal> event is received, the
       <parameter>evtInfo</parameter> pointer should be cast to a
       <structname>PGEventResultCreate *</structname>.  The
       <parameter>conn</parameter> is the connection used to generate the
       result.  This is the ideal place to initialize any
       <literal>instanceData</literal> that needs to be associated with the
       result.  If the event procedure fails, the result will be cleared and
       the failure will be propagated.  The event procedure must not try to
5709 5710 5711
       <function>PQclear</> the result object for itself.  When returning a
       failure code, all cleanup must be performed as no
       <literal>PGEVT_RESULTDESTROY</literal> event will be sent.
5712 5713 5714 5715
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5716
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pgevt-resultcopy">
5717 5718 5719 5720 5721
     <term><literal>PGEVT_RESULTCOPY</literal></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       The result copy event is fired in response to
       <function>PQcopyResult</function>.  This event will only be fired after
5722 5723 5724 5725
       the copy is complete.  Only event procedures that have
       successfully handled the <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCREATE</literal>
       or <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCOPY</literal> event for the source result
       will receive <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCOPY</literal> events.
5726

5727
<synopsis>
5728 5729 5730 5731 5732
typedef struct
{
    const PGresult *src;
    PGresult *dest;
} PGEventResultCopy;
5733
</synopsis>
5734 5735 5736 5737 5738 5739 5740 5741 5742

       When a <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCOPY</literal> event is received, the
       <parameter>evtInfo</parameter> pointer should be cast to a
       <structname>PGEventResultCopy *</structname>.  The
       <parameter>src</parameter> result is what was copied while the
       <parameter>dest</parameter> result is the copy destination.  This event
       can be used to provide a deep copy of <literal>instanceData</literal>,
       since <literal>PQcopyResult</literal> cannot do that.  If the event
       procedure fails, the entire copy operation will fail and the
5743 5744 5745 5746
       <parameter>dest</parameter> result will be cleared.   When returning a
       failure code, all cleanup must be performed as no
       <literal>PGEVT_RESULTDESTROY</literal> event will be sent for the
       destination result.
5747 5748 5749 5750
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5751
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pgevt-resultdestroy">
5752 5753 5754 5755 5756 5757 5758 5759 5760
     <term><literal>PGEVT_RESULTDESTROY</literal></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       The result destroy event is fired in response to a
       <function>PQclear</function>.  It is the event procedure's
       responsibility to properly clean up its event data as libpq has no
       ability to manage this memory.  Failure to clean up will lead
       to memory leaks.

5761
<synopsis>
5762 5763
typedef struct
{
5764
    PGresult *result;
5765
} PGEventResultDestroy;
5766
</synopsis>
5767 5768 5769 5770 5771 5772 5773 5774 5775 5776 5777 5778 5779 5780 5781 5782 5783 5784 5785

       When a <literal>PGEVT_RESULTDESTROY</literal> event is received, the
       <parameter>evtInfo</parameter> pointer should be cast to a
       <structname>PGEventResultDestroy *</structname>.  This event is fired
       prior to <function>PQclear</function> performing any other cleanup.
       The return value of the event procedure is ignored since there is no
       way of indicating a failure from <function>PQclear</function>.  Also,
       an event procedure failure should not abort the process of cleaning up
       unwanted memory.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </sect2>

  <sect2 id="libpq-events-proc">
   <title>Event Callback Procedure</title>

   <variablelist>
5786
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pgeventproc">
5787 5788 5789 5790 5791 5792 5793 5794 5795 5796 5797 5798 5799
     <term>
      <literal>PGEventProc</literal>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PGEventProc</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       <literal>PGEventProc</literal> is a typedef for a pointer to an
       event procedure, that is, the user callback function that receives
       events from libpq.  The signature of an event procedure must be

5800
<synopsis>
5801
int eventproc(PGEventId evtId, void *evtInfo, void *passThrough)
5802
</synopsis>
5803 5804 5805 5806 5807 5808 5809 5810 5811 5812 5813 5814 5815 5816 5817 5818

       The <parameter>evtId</parameter> parameter indicates which
       <literal>PGEVT</literal> event occurred.  The
       <parameter>evtInfo</parameter> pointer must be cast to the appropriate
       structure type to obtain further information about the event.
       The <parameter>passThrough</parameter> parameter is the pointer
       provided to <function>PQregisterEventProc</function> when the event
       procedure was registered.  The function should return a non-zero value
       if it succeeds and zero if it fails.
      </para>

      <para>
       A particular event procedure can be registered only once in any
       <structname>PGconn</>.  This is because the address of the procedure
       is used as a lookup key to identify the associated instance data.
      </para>
5819 5820 5821 5822 5823 5824 5825 5826 5827 5828 5829 5830 5831

      <caution>
       <para>
        On Windows, functions can have two different addresses: one visible
        from outside a DLL and another visible from inside the DLL.  One
        should be careful that only one of these addresses is used with
        <application>libpq</>'s event-procedure functions, else confusion will
        result.  The simplest rule for writing code that will work is to
        ensure that event procedures are declared <literal>static</>.  If the
        procedure's address must be available outside its own source file,
        expose a separate function to return the address.
       </para>
      </caution>
5832 5833 5834 5835 5836 5837 5838 5839 5840
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </sect2>

  <sect2 id="libpq-events-funcs">
   <title>Event Support Functions</title>

    <variablelist>
5841
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqregistereventproc">
5842 5843 5844 5845 5846 5847 5848 5849 5850 5851 5852
     <term>
      <function>PQregisterEventProc</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQregisterEventProc</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Registers an event callback procedure with libpq.

5853 5854 5855 5856
<synopsis>
int PQregisterEventProc(PGconn *conn, PGEventProc proc,
                        const char *name, void *passThrough);
</synopsis>
5857 5858 5859 5860 5861 5862 5863 5864 5865 5866 5867 5868 5869 5870 5871
      </para>

      <para>
       An event procedure must be registered once on each
       <structname>PGconn</> you want to receive events about.  There is no
       limit, other than memory, on the number of event procedures that
       can be registered with a connection.  The function returns a non-zero
       value if it succeeds and zero if it fails.
      </para>

      <para>
       The <parameter>proc</parameter> argument will be called when a libpq
       event is fired.  Its memory address is also used to lookup
       <literal>instanceData</literal>.  The <parameter>name</parameter>
       argument is used to refer to the event procedure in error messages.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5872
       This value cannot be <symbol>NULL</> or a zero-length string.  The name string is
5873 5874 5875
       copied into the <structname>PGconn</>, so what is passed need not be
       long-lived.  The <parameter>passThrough</parameter> pointer is passed
       to the <parameter>proc</parameter> whenever an event occurs. This
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5876
       argument can be <symbol>NULL</>.
5877 5878 5879 5880
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5881
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsetinstancedata">
5882 5883 5884 5885 5886 5887 5888 5889
     <term>
      <function>PQsetInstanceData</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQsetInstanceData</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5890 5891 5892 5893 5894
       Sets the connection <parameter>conn</>'s <literal>instanceData</>
       for procedure <parameter>proc</> to <parameter>data</>.  This
       returns non-zero for success and zero for failure.  (Failure is
       only possible if <parameter>proc</> has not been properly
       registered in <parameter>conn</>.)
5895

5896 5897 5898
<synopsis>
int PQsetInstanceData(PGconn *conn, PGEventProc proc, void *data);
</synopsis>
5899 5900 5901 5902
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5903
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqinstancedata">
5904 5905 5906 5907 5908 5909 5910 5911
     <term>
      <function>PQinstanceData</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQinstanceData</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5912 5913 5914 5915
       Returns the
       connection <parameter>conn</>'s <literal>instanceData</literal>
       associated with procedure <parameter>proc</>,
       or <symbol>NULL</symbol> if there is none.
5916

5917 5918 5919
<synopsis>
void *PQinstanceData(const PGconn *conn, PGEventProc proc);
</synopsis>
5920 5921 5922 5923
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5924
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqresultsetinstancedata">
5925 5926 5927 5928 5929 5930 5931 5932
     <term>
      <function>PQresultSetInstanceData</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQresultSetInstanceData</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5933 5934 5935 5936 5937
       Sets the result's <literal>instanceData</>
       for <parameter>proc</> to <parameter>data</>.  This returns
       non-zero for success and zero for failure.  (Failure is only
       possible if <parameter>proc</> has not been properly registered
       in the result.)
5938

5939 5940 5941
<synopsis>
int PQresultSetInstanceData(PGresult *res, PGEventProc proc, void *data);
</synopsis>
5942 5943 5944 5945
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5946
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqresultinstancedata">
5947 5948 5949 5950 5951 5952 5953 5954
     <term>
      <function>PQresultInstanceData</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQresultInstanceData</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5955
       Returns the result's <literal>instanceData</> associated with <parameter>proc</>, or <symbol>NULL</>
5956 5957
       if there is none.

5958 5959 5960
<synopsis>
void *PQresultInstanceData(const PGresult *res, PGEventProc proc);
</synopsis>
5961 5962 5963 5964 5965 5966 5967 5968 5969 5970 5971 5972 5973 5974
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </sect2>

  <sect2 id="libpq-events-example">
   <title>Event Example</title>

   <para>
    Here is a skeleton example of managing private data associated with
    libpq connections and results.
   </para>

5975
<programlisting>
5976
<![CDATA[
5977
/* required header for libpq events (note: includes libpq-fe.h) */
5978
#include <libpq-events.h>
5979 5980 5981 5982 5983 5984 5985 5986 5987 5988 5989 5990 5991 5992 5993 5994 5995 5996 5997 5998 5999 6000 6001 6002 6003 6004 6005 6006 6007 6008 6009 6010 6011 6012 6013 6014 6015 6016 6017 6018 6019 6020 6021 6022 6023 6024 6025 6026 6027 6028 6029 6030 6031 6032 6033 6034 6035 6036 6037 6038 6039 6040 6041 6042 6043 6044 6045 6046 6047 6048 6049

/* The instanceData */
typedef struct
{
    int n;
    char *str;
} mydata;

/* PGEventProc */
static int myEventProc(PGEventId evtId, void *evtInfo, void *passThrough);

int
main(void)
{
    mydata *data;
    PGresult *res;
    PGconn *conn = PQconnectdb("dbname = postgres");

    if (PQstatus(conn) != CONNECTION_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "Connection to database failed: %s",
                PQerrorMessage(conn));
        PQfinish(conn);
        return 1;
    }

    /* called once on any connection that should receive events.
     * Sends a PGEVT_REGISTER to myEventProc.
     */
    if (!PQregisterEventProc(conn, myEventProc, "mydata_proc", NULL))
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "Cannot register PGEventProc\n");
        PQfinish(conn);
        return 1;
    }

    /* conn instanceData is available */
    data = PQinstanceData(conn, myEventProc);

    /* Sends a PGEVT_RESULTCREATE to myEventProc */
    res = PQexec(conn, "SELECT 1 + 1");

    /* result instanceData is available */
    data = PQresultInstanceData(res, myEventProc);

    /* If PG_COPYRES_EVENTS is used, sends a PGEVT_RESULTCOPY to myEventProc */
    res_copy = PQcopyResult(res, PG_COPYRES_TUPLES | PG_COPYRES_EVENTS);

    /* result instanceData is available if PG_COPYRES_EVENTS was
     * used during the PQcopyResult call.
     */
    data = PQresultInstanceData(res_copy, myEventProc);

    /* Both clears send a PGEVT_RESULTDESTROY to myEventProc */
    PQclear(res);
    PQclear(res_copy);

    /* Sends a PGEVT_CONNDESTROY to myEventProc */
    PQfinish(conn);

    return 0;
}

static int
myEventProc(PGEventId evtId, void *evtInfo, void *passThrough)
{
    switch (evtId)
    {
        case PGEVT_REGISTER:
        {
            PGEventRegister *e = (PGEventRegister *)evtInfo;
6050
            mydata *data = get_mydata(e->conn);
6051 6052

            /* associate app specific data with connection */
6053
            PQsetInstanceData(e->conn, myEventProc, data);
6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059
            break;
        }

        case PGEVT_CONNRESET:
        {
            PGEventConnReset *e = (PGEventConnReset *)evtInfo;
6060
            mydata *data = PQinstanceData(e->conn, myEventProc);
6061 6062 6063 6064 6065 6066 6067 6068 6069

            if (data)
              memset(data, 0, sizeof(mydata));
            break;
        }

        case PGEVT_CONNDESTROY:
        {
            PGEventConnDestroy *e = (PGEventConnDestroy *)evtInfo;
6070
            mydata *data = PQinstanceData(e->conn, myEventProc);
6071 6072 6073 6074 6075 6076 6077 6078 6079 6080

            /* free instance data because the conn is being destroyed */
            if (data)
              free_mydata(data);
            break;
        }

        case PGEVT_RESULTCREATE:
        {
            PGEventResultCreate *e = (PGEventResultCreate *)evtInfo;
6081
            mydata *conn_data = PQinstanceData(e->conn, myEventProc);
6082 6083 6084
            mydata *res_data = dup_mydata(conn_data);

            /* associate app specific data with result (copy it from conn) */
6085
            PQsetResultInstanceData(e->result, myEventProc, res_data);
6086 6087 6088 6089 6090 6091
            break;
        }

        case PGEVT_RESULTCOPY:
        {
            PGEventResultCopy *e = (PGEventResultCopy *)evtInfo;
6092
            mydata *src_data = PQresultInstanceData(e->src, myEventProc);
6093 6094 6095
            mydata *dest_data = dup_mydata(src_data);

            /* associate app specific data with result (copy it from a result) */
6096
            PQsetResultInstanceData(e->dest, myEventProc, dest_data);
6097 6098 6099 6100 6101 6102
            break;
        }

        case PGEVT_RESULTDESTROY:
        {
            PGEventResultDestroy *e = (PGEventResultDestroy *)evtInfo;
6103
            mydata *data = PQresultInstanceData(e->result, myEventProc);
6104 6105 6106 6107 6108 6109 6110 6111 6112 6113 6114 6115 6116 6117

            /* free instance data because the result is being destroyed */
            if (data)
              free_mydata(data);
            break;
        }

        /* unknown event id, just return TRUE. */
        default:
            break;
    }

    return TRUE; /* event processing succeeded */
}
6118
]]>
6119 6120 6121 6122
</programlisting>
  </sect2>
 </sect1>

6123 6124
 <sect1 id="libpq-envars">
  <title>Environment Variables</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6125

6126 6127 6128
  <indexterm zone="libpq-envars">
   <primary>environment variable</primary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6129

6130 6131 6132 6133 6134 6135 6136
  <para>
   The following environment variables can be used to select default
   connection parameter values, which will be used by
   <function>PQconnectdb</>, <function>PQsetdbLogin</> and
   <function>PQsetdb</> if no value is directly specified by the calling
   code.  These are useful to avoid hard-coding database connection
   information into simple client applications, for example.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6137

6138 6139 6140 6141 6142 6143
   <itemizedlist>
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGHOST</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6144
      <envar>PGHOST</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6145
      linkend="libpq-connect-host"> connection parameter.
6146 6147 6148 6149 6150 6151 6152 6153
     </para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGHOSTADDR</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6154
      <envar>PGHOSTADDR</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6155 6156 6157
      linkend="libpq-connect-hostaddr"> connection parameter.
      This can be set instead of or in addition to <envar>PGHOST</envar>
      to avoid DNS lookup overhead.
6158 6159 6160 6161 6162 6163 6164 6165
     </para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGPORT</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6166
      <envar>PGPORT</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6167
      linkend="libpq-connect-port"> connection parameter.
6168 6169 6170 6171 6172
     </para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
     <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6173
      <indexterm>
6174 6175
       <primary><envar>PGDATABASE</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6176
      <envar>PGDATABASE</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6177 6178
      linkend="libpq-connect-dbname"> connection parameter.
      </para>
6179 6180 6181 6182 6183 6184 6185
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGUSER</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6186
      <envar>PGUSER</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6187
      linkend="libpq-connect-user"> connection parameter.
6188 6189 6190 6191
     </para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6192
     <para>
6193 6194 6195
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGPASSWORD</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6196
      <envar>PGPASSWORD</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6197 6198
      linkend="libpq-connect-password"> connection parameter.
      Use of this environment variable
6199
      is not recommended for security reasons, as some operating systems
6200
      allow non-root users to see process environment variables via
6201
      <application>ps</>; instead consider using the
6202 6203 6204 6205 6206 6207 6208 6209 6210 6211 6212 6213 6214 6215
      <filename>~/.pgpass</> file (see <xref linkend="libpq-pgpass">).
     </para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGPASSFILE</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGPASSFILE</envar> specifies the name of the password file to
      use for lookups.  If not set, it defaults to <filename>~/.pgpass</>
      (see <xref linkend="libpq-pgpass">).
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6216

6217 6218 6219 6220 6221
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGSERVICE</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6222
      <envar>PGSERVICE</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6223
      linkend="libpq-connect-service"> connection parameter.
6224 6225
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6226

6227 6228 6229 6230 6231 6232 6233 6234 6235 6236 6237 6238
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGSERVICEFILE</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGSERVICEFILE</envar> specifies the name of the per-user
      connection service file.  If not set, it defaults
      to <filename>~/.pg_service.conf</>
      (see <xref linkend="libpq-pgservice">).
     </para>
    </listitem>

6239 6240 6241 6242 6243
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGREALM</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6244
      <envar>PGREALM</envar> sets the Kerberos realm to use with
6245 6246
      <productname>PostgreSQL</productname>, if  it is different from the
      local realm.  If <envar>PGREALM</envar> is set,
6247
      <application>libpq</application> applications will attempt
6248
      authentication  with  servers for this realm and use separate ticket
6249
      files to avoid conflicts with local ticket files.   This
6250 6251 6252 6253
      environment  variable is only used if Kerberos authentication is
      selected by the server.
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6254

6255 6256 6257 6258 6259
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGOPTIONS</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6260
      <envar>PGOPTIONS</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6261
      linkend="libpq-connect-options"> connection parameter.
6262 6263
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6264

6265 6266 6267 6268 6269 6270 6271 6272 6273 6274
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGAPPNAME</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGAPPNAME</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
      linkend="libpq-connect-application-name"> connection parameter.
     </para>
    </listitem>

6275 6276 6277 6278 6279
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGSSLMODE</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6280
      <envar>PGSSLMODE</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6281
      linkend="libpq-connect-sslmode"> connection parameter.
6282 6283
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6284

6285 6286 6287 6288 6289
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGREQUIRESSL</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6290
      <envar>PGREQUIRESSL</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6291
      linkend="libpq-connect-requiressl"> connection parameter.
6292 6293
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6294

6295 6296 6297 6298 6299
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGSSLCERT</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6300
      <envar>PGSSLCERT</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6301
      linkend="libpq-connect-sslcert"> connection parameter.
6302 6303 6304
     </para>
    </listitem>

6305 6306 6307 6308 6309
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGSSLKEY</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6310
      <envar>PGSSLKEY</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6311
      linkend="libpq-connect-sslkey"> connection parameter.
6312 6313 6314 6315 6316 6317 6318 6319
     </para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGSSLROOTCERT</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6320
      <envar>PGSSLROOTCERT</envar>  behaves the same as the <xref
6321
      linkend="libpq-connect-sslrootcert"> connection parameter.
6322 6323 6324 6325 6326 6327 6328 6329
     </para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGSSLCRL</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6330
      <envar>PGSSLCRL</envar>  behaves the same as the <xref
6331
      linkend="libpq-connect-sslcrl"> connection parameter.
6332 6333
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6334

6335 6336 6337 6338 6339 6340 6341 6342 6343 6344
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGREQUIREPEER</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGREQUIREPEER</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
      linkend="libpq-connect-requirepeer"> connection parameter.
     </para>
    </listitem>

6345 6346 6347 6348 6349
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGKRBSRVNAME</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6350
      <envar>PGKRBSRVNAME</envar>  behaves the same as the <xref
6351
      linkend="libpq-connect-krbsrvname"> connection parameter.
6352 6353
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6354

6355 6356 6357 6358 6359
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGGSSLIB</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6360
      <envar>PGGSSLIB</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6361
      linkend="libpq-connect-gsslib"> connection parameter.
6362 6363
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6364

6365 6366 6367 6368 6369
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGCONNECT_TIMEOUT</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6370
      <envar>PGCONNECT_TIMEOUT</envar>  behaves the same as the <xref
6371
      linkend="libpq-connect-connect-timeout"> connection parameter.
6372 6373
     </para>
    </listitem>
6374 6375 6376 6377 6378 6379 6380 6381 6382 6383

    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGCLIENTENCODING</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGCLIENTENCODING</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
      linkend="libpq-connect-client-encoding"> connection parameter.
     </para>
    </listitem>
6384 6385
   </itemizedlist>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6386

6387
  <para>
6388 6389
   The following environment variables can be used to specify default
   behavior for each <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> session.  (See
6390 6391
   also the <xref linkend="sql-alteruser">
   and <xref linkend="sql-alterdatabase">
6392 6393
   commands for ways to set default behavior on a per-user or per-database
   basis.)
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6394

6395 6396 6397 6398 6399 6400 6401 6402 6403 6404 6405
   <itemizedlist>
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGDATESTYLE</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGDATESTYLE</envar> sets the default style of date/time
      representation.  (Equivalent to <literal>SET datestyle TO
      ...</literal>.)
     </para>
    </listitem>
6406

6407 6408 6409 6410 6411 6412 6413 6414 6415
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGTZ</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGTZ</envar> sets the default time zone.  (Equivalent to
      <literal>SET timezone TO ...</literal>.)
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6416

6417 6418 6419 6420 6421 6422 6423 6424 6425 6426
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGGEQO</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGGEQO</envar> sets the default mode for the genetic query
      optimizer.  (Equivalent to <literal>SET geqo TO ...</literal>.)
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6427

6428 6429
   Refer to the <acronym>SQL</acronym> command <xref linkend="sql-set">
   for information on correct values for these
6430
   environment variables.
6431
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6432

6433
  <para>
6434 6435
   The following environment variables determine internal behavior of
   <application>libpq</application>; they override compiled-in defaults.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6436

6437 6438 6439 6440 6441 6442 6443
   <itemizedlist>
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGSYSCONFDIR</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGSYSCONFDIR</envar> sets the directory containing the
6444 6445
      <filename>pg_service.conf</> file and in a future version
      possibly other system-wide configuration files.
6446 6447
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6448

6449 6450 6451 6452 6453 6454 6455 6456 6457 6458
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGLOCALEDIR</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGLOCALEDIR</envar> sets the directory containing the
      <literal>locale</> files for message internationalization.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
6459
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6460

6461
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6462 6463


6464 6465
 <sect1 id="libpq-pgpass">
  <title>The Password File</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6466

6467 6468 6469 6470 6471 6472
  <indexterm zone="libpq-pgpass">
   <primary>password file</primary>
  </indexterm>
  <indexterm zone="libpq-pgpass">
   <primary>.pgpass</primary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6473

6474
  <para>
6475 6476 6477 6478 6479 6480 6481
   The file <filename>.pgpass</filename> in a user's home directory or the
   file referenced by <envar>PGPASSFILE</envar> can contain passwords to
   be used if the connection requires a password (and no password has been
   specified  otherwise). On Microsoft Windows the file is named
   <filename>%APPDATA%\postgresql\pgpass.conf</> (where
   <filename>%APPDATA%</> refers to the Application Data subdirectory in
   the user's profile).
6482
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6483

6484
  <para>
6485
   This file should contain lines of the following format:
6486 6487 6488
<synopsis>
<replaceable>hostname</replaceable>:<replaceable>port</replaceable>:<replaceable>database</replaceable>:<replaceable>username</replaceable>:<replaceable>password</replaceable>
</synopsis>
6489 6490 6491 6492 6493 6494
   Each of the first four fields can be a literal value, or
   <literal>*</literal>, which matches anything.  The password field from
   the first line that matches the current connection parameters will be
   used.  (Therefore, put more-specific entries first when you are using
   wildcards.) If an entry needs to contain <literal>:</literal> or
   <literal>\</literal>, escape this character with <literal>\</literal>.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
6495
   A host name of <literal>localhost</> matches both TCP (host name
6496 6497
   <literal>localhost</>) and Unix domain socket (<literal>pghost</> empty
   or the default socket directory) connections coming from the local
6498 6499
   machine. In a standby server, a database name of <literal>replication</>
   matches streaming replication connections made to the master server.
6500 6501
   The <literal>database</> field is of limited usefulness because
   users have the same password for all databases in the same cluster.
6502
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6503

6504
  <para>
6505 6506 6507 6508 6509 6510
   On Unix systems, the permissions on <filename>.pgpass</filename> must
   disallow any access to world or group; achieve this by the command
   <command>chmod 0600 ~/.pgpass</command>.  If the permissions are less
   strict than this, the file will be ignored.  On Microsoft Windows, it
   is assumed that the file is stored in a directory that is secure, so
   no special permissions check is made.
6511
  </para>
6512
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6513 6514


6515 6516
 <sect1 id="libpq-pgservice">
  <title>The Connection Service File</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6517

6518 6519 6520 6521 6522 6523
  <indexterm zone="libpq-pgservice">
   <primary>connection service file</primary>
  </indexterm>
  <indexterm zone="libpq-pgservice">
   <primary>pg_service.conf</primary>
  </indexterm>
6524 6525 6526
  <indexterm zone="libpq-pgservice">
   <primary>.pg_service.conf</primary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6527

6528
  <para>
6529 6530 6531 6532 6533 6534
   The connection service file allows libpq connection parameters to be
   associated with a single service name. That service name can then be
   specified by a libpq connection, and the associated settings will be
   used. This allows connection parameters to be modified without requiring
   a recompile of the libpq application. The service name can also be
   specified using the <envar>PGSERVICE</envar> environment variable.
6535
  </para>
6536 6537

  <para>
6538 6539 6540 6541 6542 6543 6544 6545 6546 6547 6548 6549 6550 6551 6552 6553 6554 6555 6556 6557 6558 6559 6560 6561 6562
   The connection service file can be a per-user service file
   at <filename>~/.pg_service.conf</filename> or the location
   specified by the environment variable <envar>PGSERVICEFILE</envar>,
   or it can be a system-wide file
   at <filename>etc/pg_service.conf</filename> or in the directory
   specified by the environment variable
   <envar>PGSYSCONFDIR</envar>.  If service definitions with the same
   name exist in the user and the system file, the user file takes
   precedence.
  </para>

  <para>
   The file uses an <quote>INI file</quote> format where the section
   name is the service name and the parameters are connection
   parameters; see <xref linkend="libpq-connect"> for a list.  For
   example:
<programlisting>
# comment
[mydb]
host=somehost
port=5433
user=admin
</programlisting>
   An example file is provided at
   <filename>share/pg_service.conf.sample</filename>.
6563 6564
  </para>
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6565 6566


6567 6568
 <sect1 id="libpq-ldap">
  <title>LDAP Lookup of Connection Parameters</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6569

6570 6571 6572
  <indexterm zone="libpq-ldap">
   <primary>LDAP connection parameter lookup</primary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6573

6574
  <para>
6575 6576 6577 6578 6579 6580
   If <application>libpq</application> has been compiled with LDAP support (option
   <literal><option>--with-ldap</option></literal> for <command>configure</command>)
   it is possible to retrieve connection options like <literal>host</literal>
   or <literal>dbname</literal> via LDAP from a central server.
   The advantage is that if the connection parameters for a database change,
   the connection information doesn't have to be updated on all client machines.
6581
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6582

6583
  <para>
6584 6585 6586 6587 6588 6589 6590 6591 6592
   LDAP connection parameter lookup uses the connection service file
   <filename>pg_service.conf</filename> (see <xref
   linkend="libpq-pgservice">).  A line in a
   <filename>pg_service.conf</filename> stanza that starts with
   <literal>ldap://</literal> will be recognized as an LDAP URL and an
   LDAP query will be performed. The result must be a list of
   <literal>keyword = value</literal> pairs which will be used to set
   connection options.  The URL must conform to RFC 1959 and be of the
   form
6593 6594 6595
<synopsis>
ldap://[<replaceable>hostname</replaceable>[:<replaceable>port</replaceable>]]/<replaceable>search_base</replaceable>?<replaceable>attribute</replaceable>?<replaceable>search_scope</replaceable>?<replaceable>filter</replaceable>
</synopsis>
6596 6597 6598
   where <replaceable>hostname</replaceable> defaults to
   <literal>localhost</literal> and <replaceable>port</replaceable>
   defaults to 389.
6599
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6600

6601
  <para>
6602 6603 6604 6605 6606 6607 6608
   Processing of <filename>pg_service.conf</filename> is terminated after
   a successful LDAP lookup, but is continued if the LDAP server cannot
   be contacted.  This is to provide a fallback with further LDAP URL
   lines that point to different LDAP servers, classical <literal>keyword
   = value</literal> pairs, or default connection options.  If you would
   rather get an error message in this case, add a syntactically incorrect
   line after the LDAP URL.
6609
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6610

6611 6612
  <para>
   A sample LDAP entry that has been created with the LDIF file
6613 6614 6615 6616 6617 6618 6619 6620 6621 6622 6623 6624 6625
<programlisting>
version:1
dn:cn=mydatabase,dc=mycompany,dc=com
changetype:add
objectclass:top
objectclass:groupOfUniqueNames
cn:mydatabase
uniqueMember:host=dbserver.mycompany.com
uniqueMember:port=5439
uniqueMember:dbname=mydb
uniqueMember:user=mydb_user
uniqueMember:sslmode=require
</programlisting>
6626
   might be queried with the following LDAP URL:
6627 6628 6629
<programlisting>
ldap://ldap.mycompany.com/dc=mycompany,dc=com?uniqueMember?one?(cn=mydatabase)
</programlisting>
6630
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6631 6632 6633 6634 6635

  <para>
   You can also mix regular service file entries with LDAP lookups.
   A complete example for a stanza in <filename>pg_service.conf</filename>
   would be:
6636 6637 6638 6639 6640 6641 6642
<programlisting>
# only host and port are stored in LDAP, specify dbname and user explicitly
[customerdb]
dbname=customer
user=appuser
ldap://ldap.acme.com/cn=dbserver,cn=hosts?pgconnectinfo?base?(objectclass=*)
</programlisting>
6643 6644
  </para>

6645
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6646 6647


6648 6649
 <sect1 id="libpq-ssl">
  <title>SSL Support</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6650

6651 6652
  <indexterm zone="libpq-ssl">
   <primary>SSL</primary>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
6653
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6654

6655
  <para>
6656 6657 6658 6659
   <productname>PostgreSQL</> has native support for using <acronym>SSL</>
   connections to encrypt client/server communications for increased
   security. See <xref linkend="ssl-tcp"> for details about the server-side
   <acronym>SSL</> functionality.
6660
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6661

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6662
  <para>
6663 6664 6665
   <application>libpq</application> reads the system-wide
   <productname>OpenSSL</productname> configuration file. By default, this
   file is named <filename>openssl.cnf</filename> and is located in the
6666 6667
   directory reported by <literal>openssl version -d</>.  This default
   can be overridden by setting environment variable
6668 6669
   <envar>OPENSSL_CONF</envar> to the name of the desired configuration
   file.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6670
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6671

6672
 <sect2 id="libq-ssl-certificates">
6673
  <title>Client Verification of Server Certificates</title>
6674 6675

  <para>
6676
   By default, <productname>PostgreSQL</> will not perform any verification of
6677 6678
   the server certificate. This means that it is possible to spoof the server
   identity (for example by modifying a DNS record or by taking over the server
6679
   IP address) without the client knowing. In order to prevent spoofing,
6680
   <acronym>SSL</> certificate verification must be used.
6681 6682 6683
  </para>

  <para>
6684 6685 6686 6687
   If the parameter <literal>sslmode</> is set to <literal>verify-ca</>,
   libpq will verify that the server is trustworthy by checking the
   certificate chain up to a trusted certificate authority
   (<acronym>CA</>). If <literal>sslmode</> is set to <literal>verify-full</>,
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
6688
   libpq will <emphasis>also</> verify that the server host name matches its
6689 6690 6691
   certificate. The SSL connection will fail if the server certificate cannot
   be verified. <literal>verify-full</> is recommended in most
   security-sensitive environments.
6692 6693
  </para>

6694
  <para>
6695
   In <literal>verify-full</> mode, the <literal>cn</> (Common Name) attribute
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
6696
   of the certificate is matched against the host name. If the <literal>cn</>
6697 6698 6699
   attribute starts with an asterisk (<literal>*</>), it will be treated as
   a wildcard, and will match all characters <emphasis>except</> a dot
   (<literal>.</>). This means the certificate will not match subdomains.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
6700
   If the connection is made using an IP address instead of a host name, the
6701 6702 6703 6704
   IP address will be matched (without doing any DNS lookups).
  </para>

  <para>
6705 6706
   To allow server certificate verification, the certificate(s) of one or more
   trusted <acronym>CA</>s must be
6707 6708
   placed in the file <filename>~/.postgresql/root.crt</> in the user's home
   directory. (On Microsoft Windows the file is named
6709
   <filename>%APPDATA%\postgresql\root.crt</filename>.)
6710 6711 6712
  </para>

  <para>
6713
   Certificate Revocation List (CRL) entries are also checked
6714 6715 6716
   if the file <filename>~/.postgresql/root.crl</filename> exists
   (<filename>%APPDATA%\postgresql\root.crl</filename> on Microsoft
   Windows).
6717 6718 6719
  </para>

  <para>
6720 6721 6722
   The location of the root certificate file and the CRL can be changed by
   setting
   the connection parameters <literal>sslrootcert</> and <literal>sslcrl</>
6723
   or the environment variables <envar>PGSSLROOTCERT</> and <envar>PGSSLCRL</>.
6724
  </para>
6725 6726 6727
 </sect2>

 <sect2 id="libpq-ssl-clientcert">
6728
  <title>Client Certificates</title>
6729 6730 6731

  <para>
   If the server requests a trusted client certificate,
6732
   <application>libpq</application> will send the certificate stored in
6733 6734 6735 6736
   file <filename>~/.postgresql/postgresql.crt</> in the user's home
   directory.  The certificate must be signed by one of the certificate
   authorities (<acronym>CA</acronym>) trusted by the server.  A matching
   private key file <filename>~/.postgresql/postgresql.key</> must also
6737
   be present. The private
6738 6739 6740
   key file must not allow any access to world or group; achieve this by the
   command <command>chmod 0600 ~/.postgresql/postgresql.key</command>.
   On Microsoft Windows these files are named
6741
   <filename>%APPDATA%\postgresql\postgresql.crt</filename> and
6742 6743
   <filename>%APPDATA%\postgresql\postgresql.key</filename>, and there
   is no special permissions check since the directory is presumed secure.
6744 6745 6746
   The location of the certificate and key files can be overridden by the
   connection parameters <literal>sslcert</> and <literal>sslkey</> or the
   environment variables <envar>PGSSLCERT</> and <envar>PGSSLKEY</>.
6747 6748
  </para>

6749 6750 6751 6752 6753 6754 6755 6756 6757 6758 6759 6760 6761 6762 6763 6764 6765 6766
  <para>
   In some cases, the client certificate might be signed by an
   <quote>intermediate</> certificate authority, rather than one that is
   directly trusted by the server.  To use such a certificate, append the
   certificate of the signing authority to the <filename>postgresql.crt</>
   file, then its parent authority's certificate, and so on up to a
   <quote>root</> authority that is trusted by the server.  The root
   certificate should be included in every case where
   <filename>postgresql.crt</> contains more than one certificate.
  </para>

  <para>
   Note that <filename>root.crt</filename> lists the top-level CAs that are
   considered trusted for signing server certificates.  In principle it need
   not list the CA that signed the client's certificate, though in most cases
   that CA would also be trusted for server certificates.
  </para>

6767
 </sect2>
6768 6769

 <sect2 id="libpq-ssl-protection">
6770
  <title>Protection Provided in Different Modes</title>
6771 6772 6773

  <para>
   The different values for the <literal>sslmode</> parameter provide different
6774 6775
   levels of protection. SSL can provide
   protection against three types of attacks:
6776 6777
  </para>
  <table id="libpq-ssl-protect-attacks">
6778
   <title>SSL Attacks</title>
6779 6780 6781 6782 6783 6784 6785 6786 6787 6788 6789
   <tgroup cols="2">
    <thead>
     <row>
      <entry>Type</entry>
      <entry>Description</entry>
     </row>
    </thead>

    <tbody>
     <row>
      <entry>Eavesdropping</entry>
6790
      <entry>If a third party can examine the network traffic between the
6791
       client and the server, it can read both connection information (including
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
6792
       the user name and password) and the data that is passed. <acronym>SSL</>
6793 6794 6795 6796 6797 6798 6799 6800 6801 6802 6803 6804 6805 6806 6807 6808 6809 6810 6811 6812 6813 6814 6815 6816 6817 6818 6819 6820 6821 6822 6823 6824
       uses encryption to prevent this.
      </entry>
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry>Man in the middle (<acronym>MITM</>)</entry>
      <entry>If a third party can modify the data while passing between the
       client and server, it can pretend to be the server and therefore see and
       modify data <emphasis>even if it is encrypted</>. The third party can then
       forward the connection information and data to the original server,
       making it impossible to detect this attack. Common vectors to do this
       include DNS poisoning and address hijacking, whereby the client is directed
       to a different server than intended. There are also several other
       attack methods that can accomplish this. <acronym>SSL</> uses certificate
       verification to prevent this, by authenticating the server to the client.
      </entry>
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry>Impersonation</entry>
      <entry>If a third party can pretend to be an authorized client, it can
       simply access data it should not have access to. Typically this can
       happen through insecure password management. <acronym>SSL</> uses
       client certificates to prevent this, by making sure that only holders
       of valid certificates can access the server.
      </entry>
     </row>
    </tbody>
   </tgroup>
  </table>

  <para>
6825 6826
   For a connection to be known secure, SSL usage must be configured
   on <emphasis>both the client and the server</> before the connection
6827 6828
   is made. If it is only configured on the server, the client may end up
   sending sensitive information (e.g. passwords) before
6829 6830
   it knows that the server requires high security. In libpq, secure
   connections can be ensured
6831 6832
   by setting the <literal>sslmode</> parameter to <literal>verify-full</> or
   <literal>verify-ca</>, and providing the system with a root certificate to
6833
   verify against. This is analogous to using an <literal>https</>
6834 6835 6836 6837 6838 6839
   <acronym>URL</> for encrypted web browsing.
  </para>

  <para>
   Once the server has been authenticated, the client can pass sensitive data.
   This means that up until this point, the client does not need to know if
6840
   certificates will be used for authentication, making it safe to specify that
6841 6842 6843 6844 6845
   only in the server configuration.
  </para>

  <para>
   All <acronym>SSL</> options carry overhead in the form of encryption and
6846
   key-exchange, so there is a tradeoff that has to be made between performance
6847 6848 6849 6850 6851 6852
   and security. The following table illustrates the risks the different
   <literal>sslmode</> values protect against, and what statement they make
   about security and overhead:
  </para>

  <table id="libpq-ssl-sslmode-statements">
6853
   <title>SSL Mode Descriptions</title>
6854 6855 6856 6857 6858 6859 6860 6861 6862 6863 6864 6865 6866 6867 6868 6869 6870 6871 6872 6873 6874 6875 6876 6877 6878 6879 6880 6881 6882 6883 6884 6885 6886 6887 6888 6889 6890 6891 6892 6893 6894 6895 6896 6897 6898 6899 6900 6901 6902 6903 6904 6905 6906 6907 6908 6909 6910 6911 6912 6913 6914 6915 6916 6917 6918 6919 6920 6921 6922 6923 6924 6925 6926 6927
   <tgroup cols="4">
    <thead>
     <row>
      <entry><literal>sslmode</></entry>
      <entry>Eavesdropping protection</entry>
      <entry><acronym>MITM</> protection</entry>
      <entry>Statement</entry>
     </row>
    </thead>

    <tbody>
     <row>
      <entry><literal>disabled</></entry>
      <entry>No</entry>
      <entry>No</entry>
      <entry>I don't care about security, and I don't want to pay the overhead
       of encryption.
      </entry>
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry><literal>allow</></entry>
      <entry>Maybe</entry>
      <entry>No</entry>
      <entry>I don't care about security, but I will pay the overhead of
       encryption if the server insists on it.
      </entry>
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry><literal>prefer</></entry>
      <entry>Maybe</entry>
      <entry>No</entry>
      <entry>I don't care about encryption, but I wish to pay the overhead of
       encryption if the server supports it.
      </entry>
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry><literal>require</></entry>
      <entry>Yes</entry>
      <entry>No</entry>
      <entry>I want my data to be encrypted, and I accept the overhead. I trust
       that the network will make sure I always connect to the server I want.
      </entry>
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry><literal>verify-ca</></entry>
      <entry>Yes</entry>
      <entry><literal>Depends on CA</>-policy</entry>
      <entry>I want my data encrypted, and I accept the overhead. I want to be
       sure that I connect to a server that I trust.
      </entry>
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry><literal>verify-full</></entry>
       <entry>Yes</entry>
       <entry>Yes</entry>
       <entry>I want my data encrypted, and I accept the overhead. I want to be
        sure that I connect to a server I trust, and that it's the one I
        specify.
       </entry>
      </row>

    </tbody>
   </tgroup>
  </table>

  <para>
   The difference between <literal>verify-ca</> and <literal>verify-full</>
   depends on the policy of the root <acronym>CA</>. If a public
   <acronym>CA</> is used, <literal>verify-ca</> allows connections to a server
6928 6929
   that <emphasis>somebody else</> may have registered with the <acronym>CA</>.
   In this case, <literal>verify-full</> should always be used. If
6930 6931 6932 6933 6934 6935 6936 6937
   a local <acronym>CA</> is used, or even a self-signed certificate, using
   <literal>verify-ca</> often provides enough protection.
  </para>

  <para>
   The default value for <literal>sslmode</> is <literal>prefer</>. As is shown
   in the table, this makes no sense from a security point of view, and it only
   promises performance overhead if possible. It is only provided as the default
6938
   for backward compatibility, and is not recommended in secure deployments.
6939 6940 6941 6942
  </para>

 </sect2>

6943
 <sect2 id="libpq-ssl-fileusage">
6944
  <title>SSL Client File Usage</title>
6945
  <table id="libpq-ssl-file-usage">
6946
   <title>Libpq/Client SSL File Usage</title>
6947 6948 6949 6950 6951 6952 6953 6954 6955 6956 6957 6958 6959 6960 6961 6962 6963 6964 6965 6966
   <tgroup cols="3">
    <thead>
     <row>
      <entry>File</entry>
      <entry>Contents</entry>
      <entry>Effect</entry>
     </row>
    </thead>

    <tbody>

     <row>
      <entry><filename>~/.postgresql/postgresql.crt</></entry>
      <entry>client certificate</entry>
      <entry>requested by server</entry>
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry><filename>~/.postgresql/postgresql.key</></entry>
      <entry>client private key</entry>
6967 6968
      <entry>proves client certificate sent by owner; does not indicate
      certificate owner is trustworthy</entry>
6969 6970 6971 6972 6973
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry><filename>~/.postgresql/root.crt</></entry>
      <entry>trusted certificate authorities</entry>
6974
      <entry>checks that server certificate is signed by a trusted certificate
6975
      authority</entry>
6976 6977 6978 6979 6980 6981 6982 6983 6984 6985 6986
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry><filename>~/.postgresql/root.crl</></entry>
      <entry>certificates revoked by certificate authorities</entry>
      <entry>server certificate must not be on this list</entry>
     </row>

    </tbody>
   </tgroup>
  </table>
6987 6988 6989
 </sect2>

 <sect2 id="libpq-ssl-initialize">
6990
  <title>SSL Library Initialization</title>
6991

6992 6993 6994 6995 6996 6997 6998 6999 7000 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007
  <para>
   If your application initializes <literal>libssl</> and/or
   <literal>libcrypto</> libraries and <application>libpq</application>
   is built with <acronym>SSL</> support, you should call
   <function>PQinitOpenSSL</> to tell <application>libpq</application>
   that the <literal>libssl</> and/or <literal>libcrypto</> libraries
   have been initialized by your application, so that
   <application>libpq</application> will not also initialize those libraries.
   <!-- If this URL changes replace it with a URL to www.archive.org. -->
   See <ulink
   url="http://h71000.www7.hp.com/doc/83final/BA554_90007/ch04.html"></ulink>
   for details on the SSL API.
  </para>

  <para>
   <variablelist>
7008
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqinitopenssl">
7009 7010 7011 7012 7013 7014 7015 7016 7017 7018
     <term>
      <function>PQinitOpenSSL</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQinitOpenSSL</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Allows applications to select which security libraries to initialize.
7019 7020 7021
<synopsis>
void PQinitOpenSSL(int do_ssl, int do_crypto);
</synopsis>
7022 7023 7024 7025 7026 7027 7028 7029 7030 7031 7032 7033 7034 7035 7036 7037 7038 7039 7040 7041 7042 7043
      </para>

      <para>
       When <parameter>do_ssl</> is non-zero, <application>libpq</application>
       will initialize the <application>OpenSSL</> library before first
       opening a database connection.  When <parameter>do_crypto</> is
       non-zero, the <literal>libcrypto</> library will be initialized.  By
       default (if <function>PQinitOpenSSL</> is not called), both libraries
       are initialized.  When SSL support is not compiled in, this function is
       present but does nothing.
      </para>

      <para>
       If your application uses and initializes either <application>OpenSSL</>
       or its underlying <literal>libcrypto</> library, you <emphasis>must</>
       call this function with zeroes for the appropriate parameter(s)
       before first opening a database connection.  Also be sure that you
       have done that initialization before opening a database connection.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

7044
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqinitssl">
7045 7046 7047 7048 7049 7050 7051 7052 7053 7054
     <term>
      <function>PQinitSSL</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQinitSSL</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Allows applications to select which security libraries to initialize.
7055 7056 7057
<synopsis>
void PQinitSSL(int do_ssl);
</synopsis>
7058 7059 7060 7061 7062 7063 7064 7065 7066 7067 7068 7069 7070 7071 7072 7073 7074 7075 7076 7077
      </para>

      <para>
       This function is equivalent to
       <literal>PQinitOpenSSL(do_ssl, do_ssl)</>.
       It is sufficient for applications that initialize both or neither
       of <application>OpenSSL</> and <literal>libcrypto</>.
      </para>

      <para>
       <function>PQinitSSL</> has been present since
       <productname>PostgreSQL</> 8.0, while <function>PQinitOpenSSL</>
       was added in <productname>PostgreSQL</> 8.4, so <function>PQinitSSL</>
       might be preferable for applications that need to work with older
       versions of <application>libpq</application>.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </para>
7078
 </sect2>
7079

7080
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7081 7082


7083 7084
 <sect1 id="libpq-threading">
  <title>Behavior in Threaded Programs</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7085

7086 7087 7088 7089
  <indexterm zone="libpq-threading">
   <primary>threads</primary>
   <secondary>with libpq</secondary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7090

7091
  <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7092 7093
   <application>libpq</application> is reentrant and thread-safe by default.
   You might need to use special compiler command-line
7094 7095
   options when you compile your application code.  Refer to your
   system's documentation for information about how to build
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7096
   thread-enabled applications, or look in
7097 7098 7099 7100
   <filename>src/Makefile.global</filename> for <literal>PTHREAD_CFLAGS</>
   and <literal>PTHREAD_LIBS</>.  This function allows the querying of
   <application>libpq</application>'s thread-safe status:
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7101

7102
  <variablelist>
7103
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqisthreadsafe">
7104 7105 7106 7107 7108 7109
    <term>
     <function>PQisthreadsafe</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQisthreadsafe</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>
7110

7111 7112 7113 7114
    <listitem>
     <para>
      Returns the thread safety status of the
      <application>libpq</application> library.
7115 7116 7117
<synopsis>
int PQisthreadsafe();
</synopsis>
7118
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7119

7120 7121 7122 7123 7124 7125 7126
     <para>
      Returns 1 if the <application>libpq</application> is thread-safe
      and 0 if it is not.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>
  </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7127

7128 7129 7130 7131 7132 7133 7134
  <para>
   One thread restriction is that no two threads attempt to manipulate
   the same <structname>PGconn</> object at the same time. In particular,
   you cannot issue concurrent commands from different threads through
   the same connection object. (If you need to run concurrent commands,
   use multiple connections.)
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7135

7136 7137 7138 7139
  <para>
   <structname>PGresult</> objects are read-only after creation, and so
   can be passed around freely between threads.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7140

7141 7142 7143 7144 7145 7146 7147 7148
  <para>
   The deprecated functions <function>PQrequestCancel</function> and
   <function>PQoidStatus</function> are not thread-safe and should not be
   used in multithread programs.  <function>PQrequestCancel</function>
   can be replaced by <function>PQcancel</function>.
   <function>PQoidStatus</function> can be replaced by
   <function>PQoidValue</function>.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7149

7150 7151 7152 7153 7154 7155 7156 7157
  <para>
   If you are using Kerberos inside your application (in addition to inside
   <application>libpq</application>), you will need to do locking around
   Kerberos calls because Kerberos functions are not thread-safe.  See
   function <function>PQregisterThreadLock</> in the
   <application>libpq</application> source code for a way to do cooperative
   locking between <application>libpq</application> and your application.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7158

7159 7160 7161 7162 7163 7164 7165 7166
  <para>
   If you experience problems with threaded applications, run the program
   in <filename>src/tools/thread</> to see if your platform has
   thread-unsafe functions.  This program is run by
   <filename>configure</filename>, but for binary distributions your
   library might not match the library used to build the binaries.
  </para>
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7167 7168


7169
 <sect1 id="libpq-build">
7170
  <title>Building <application>libpq</application> Programs</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7171

P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7172 7173 7174 7175
  <indexterm zone="libpq-build">
   <primary>compiling</primary>
   <secondary>libpq applications</secondary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7176

7177
  <para>
T
Tom Lane 已提交
7178
   To build (i.e., compile and link) a program using
7179 7180
   <application>libpq</application> you need to do all of the following
   things:
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7181

7182 7183 7184 7185 7186
   <itemizedlist>
    <listitem>
     <para>
      Include the <filename>libpq-fe.h</filename> header file:
<programlisting>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7187
#include &lt;libpq-fe.h&gt;
7188
</programlisting>
7189
      If you failed to do that then you will normally get error messages
7190
      from your compiler similar to:
7191 7192 7193 7194 7195 7196 7197 7198 7199 7200
<screen>
foo.c: In function `main':
foo.c:34: `PGconn' undeclared (first use in this function)
foo.c:35: `PGresult' undeclared (first use in this function)
foo.c:54: `CONNECTION_BAD' undeclared (first use in this function)
foo.c:68: `PGRES_COMMAND_OK' undeclared (first use in this function)
foo.c:95: `PGRES_TUPLES_OK' undeclared (first use in this function)
</screen>
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7201

7202 7203
    <listitem>
     <para>
7204
      Point your compiler to the directory where the <productname>PostgreSQL</> header
7205 7206 7207 7208 7209 7210 7211 7212 7213 7214 7215 7216 7217 7218 7219
      files were installed, by supplying the
      <literal>-I<replaceable>directory</replaceable></literal> option
      to your compiler.  (In some cases the compiler will look into
      the directory in question by default, so you can omit this
      option.)  For instance, your compile command line could look
      like:
<programlisting>
cc -c -I/usr/local/pgsql/include testprog.c
</programlisting>
      If you are using makefiles then add the option to the
      <varname>CPPFLAGS</varname> variable:
<programlisting>
CPPFLAGS += -I/usr/local/pgsql/include
</programlisting>
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7220

7221 7222 7223 7224
     <para>
      If there is any chance that your program might be compiled by
      other users then you should not hardcode the directory location
      like that.  Instead, you can run the utility
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7225 7226 7227
      <command>pg_config</command><indexterm><primary>pg_config</><secondary
      sortas="libpq">with libpq</></> to find out where the header
      files are on the local system:
7228 7229 7230 7231 7232
<screen>
<prompt>$</prompt> pg_config --includedir
<computeroutput>/usr/local/include</computeroutput>
</screen>
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7233

7234 7235
     <para>
      Failure to specify the correct option to the compiler will
7236
      result in an error message such as:
7237 7238 7239 7240 7241
<screen>
testlibpq.c:8:22: libpq-fe.h: No such file or directory
</screen>
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7242

7243 7244 7245
    <listitem>
     <para>
      When linking the final program, specify the option
7246 7247 7248 7249 7250
      <literal>-lpq</literal> so that the <application>libpq</application>
      library gets pulled in, as well as the option
      <literal>-L<replaceable>directory</replaceable></literal> to point
      the compiler to the directory where the
      <application>libpq</application> library resides.  (Again, the
7251 7252 7253 7254 7255 7256 7257
      compiler will search some directories by default.)  For maximum
      portability, put the <option>-L</option> option before the
      <option>-lpq</option> option.  For example:
<programlisting>
cc -o testprog testprog1.o testprog2.o -L/usr/local/pgsql/lib -lpq
</programlisting>
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7258

7259 7260 7261 7262 7263 7264 7265 7266
     <para>
      You can find out the library directory using
      <command>pg_config</command> as well:
<screen>
<prompt>$</prompt> pg_config --libdir
<computeroutput>/usr/local/pgsql/lib</computeroutput>
</screen>
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7267

7268
     <para>
7269
      Error messages that point to problems in this area could look like
7270
      the following:
7271 7272 7273 7274 7275 7276 7277 7278 7279 7280
<screen>
testlibpq.o: In function `main':
testlibpq.o(.text+0x60): undefined reference to `PQsetdbLogin'
testlibpq.o(.text+0x71): undefined reference to `PQstatus'
testlibpq.o(.text+0xa4): undefined reference to `PQerrorMessage'
</screen>
      This means you forgot <option>-lpq</option>.
<screen>
/usr/bin/ld: cannot find -lpq
</screen>
7281 7282
      This means you forgot the <option>-L</option> option or did not
      specify the right directory.
7283 7284 7285 7286
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7287

7288
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7289 7290


7291 7292
 <sect1 id="libpq-example">
  <title>Example Programs</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7293

7294 7295 7296 7297 7298 7299
  <para>
   These examples and others can be found in the
   directory <filename>src/test/examples</filename> in the source code
   distribution.
  </para>

7300
  <example id="libpq-example-1">
7301
   <title><application>libpq</application> Example Program 1</title>
7302

7303
<programlisting>
7304
<![CDATA[
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7305
/*
7306
 * testlibpq.c
7307
 *
7308
 *      Test the C version of libpq, the PostgreSQL frontend library.
7309
 */
7310 7311
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
7312
#include <libpq-fe.h>
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7313

7314
static void
7315
exit_nicely(PGconn *conn)
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7316
{
7317 7318
    PQfinish(conn);
    exit(1);
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7319 7320
}

7321 7322
int
main(int argc, char **argv)
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7323
{
7324 7325 7326 7327 7328 7329 7330 7331 7332 7333 7334 7335
    const char *conninfo;
    PGconn     *conn;
    PGresult   *res;
    int         nFields;
    int         i,
                j;

    /*
     * If the user supplies a parameter on the command line, use it as the
     * conninfo string; otherwise default to setting dbname=postgres and using
     * environment variables or defaults for all other connection parameters.
     */
7336
    if (argc > 1)
7337 7338 7339 7340 7341 7342 7343 7344 7345 7346 7347 7348 7349 7350 7351 7352 7353 7354 7355 7356 7357 7358 7359 7360 7361 7362 7363
        conninfo = argv[1];
    else
        conninfo = "dbname = postgres";

    /* Make a connection to the database */
    conn = PQconnectdb(conninfo);

    /* Check to see that the backend connection was successfully made */
    if (PQstatus(conn) != CONNECTION_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "Connection to database failed: %s",
                PQerrorMessage(conn));
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }

    /*
     * Our test case here involves using a cursor, for which we must be inside
     * a transaction block.  We could do the whole thing with a single
     * PQexec() of "select * from pg_database", but that's too trivial to make
     * a good example.
     */

    /* Start a transaction block */
    res = PQexec(conn, "BEGIN");
    if (PQresultStatus(res) != PGRES_COMMAND_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "BEGIN command failed: %s", PQerrorMessage(conn));
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7364
        PQclear(res);
7365 7366 7367 7368 7369 7370 7371 7372 7373 7374 7375 7376 7377 7378 7379 7380
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }

    /*
     * Should PQclear PGresult whenever it is no longer needed to avoid memory
     * leaks
     */
    PQclear(res);

    /*
     * Fetch rows from pg_database, the system catalog of databases
     */
    res = PQexec(conn, "DECLARE myportal CURSOR FOR select * from pg_database");
    if (PQresultStatus(res) != PGRES_COMMAND_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "DECLARE CURSOR failed: %s", PQerrorMessage(conn));
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7381
        PQclear(res);
7382 7383 7384 7385 7386 7387 7388 7389 7390 7391 7392
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }
    PQclear(res);

    res = PQexec(conn, "FETCH ALL in myportal");
    if (PQresultStatus(res) != PGRES_TUPLES_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "FETCH ALL failed: %s", PQerrorMessage(conn));
        PQclear(res);
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7393

7394 7395
    /* first, print out the attribute names */
    nFields = PQnfields(res);
7396
    for (i = 0; i < nFields; i++)
7397 7398
        printf("%-15s", PQfname(res, i));
    printf("\n\n");
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7399

7400
    /* next, print out the rows */
7401
    for (i = 0; i < PQntuples(res); i++)
7402
    {
7403
        for (j = 0; j < nFields; j++)
7404 7405 7406
            printf("%-15s", PQgetvalue(res, i, j));
        printf("\n");
    }
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7407

7408
    PQclear(res);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7409

7410 7411 7412
    /* close the portal ... we don't bother to check for errors ... */
    res = PQexec(conn, "CLOSE myportal");
    PQclear(res);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7413

7414 7415 7416
    /* end the transaction */
    res = PQexec(conn, "END");
    PQclear(res);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7417

7418 7419
    /* close the connection to the database and cleanup */
    PQfinish(conn);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7420

7421
    return 0;
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7422
}
7423
]]>
7424
</programlisting>
7425
  </example>
7426

7427
  <example id="libpq-example-2">
7428
   <title><application>libpq</application> Example Program 2</title>
7429

7430
<programlisting>
7431
<![CDATA[
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7432
/*
T
Tom Lane 已提交
7433
 * testlibpq2.c
7434
 *      Test of the asynchronous notification interface
7435
 *
T
Tom Lane 已提交
7436 7437
 * Start this program, then from psql in another window do
 *   NOTIFY TBL2;
7438
 * Repeat four times to get this program to exit.
7439
 *
T
Tom Lane 已提交
7440
 * Or, if you want to get fancy, try this:
7441 7442
 * populate a database with the following commands
 * (provided in src/test/examples/testlibpq2.sql):
7443
 *
T
Tom Lane 已提交
7444
 *   CREATE TABLE TBL1 (i int4);
7445
 *
T
Tom Lane 已提交
7446
 *   CREATE TABLE TBL2 (i int4);
7447
 *
T
Tom Lane 已提交
7448
 *   CREATE RULE r1 AS ON INSERT TO TBL1 DO
7449
 *     (INSERT INTO TBL2 VALUES (new.i); NOTIFY TBL2);
7450
 *
7451
 * and do this four times:
7452
 *
7453
 *   INSERT INTO TBL1 VALUES (10);
7454
 */
7455 7456 7457 7458 7459
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <errno.h>
#include <sys/time.h>
7460
#include <libpq-fe.h>
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7461

7462
static void
7463
exit_nicely(PGconn *conn)
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7464
{
7465 7466
    PQfinish(conn);
    exit(1);
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7467 7468
}

7469 7470
int
main(int argc, char **argv)
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7471
{
7472 7473 7474 7475 7476 7477 7478 7479 7480 7481 7482
    const char *conninfo;
    PGconn     *conn;
    PGresult   *res;
    PGnotify   *notify;
    int         nnotifies;

    /*
     * If the user supplies a parameter on the command line, use it as the
     * conninfo string; otherwise default to setting dbname=postgres and using
     * environment variables or defaults for all other connection parameters.
     */
7483
    if (argc > 1)
7484 7485 7486 7487 7488 7489 7490 7491 7492 7493 7494 7495 7496 7497 7498 7499 7500 7501 7502 7503 7504 7505 7506 7507 7508 7509 7510 7511 7512 7513 7514 7515 7516 7517
        conninfo = argv[1];
    else
        conninfo = "dbname = postgres";

    /* Make a connection to the database */
    conn = PQconnectdb(conninfo);

    /* Check to see that the backend connection was successfully made */
    if (PQstatus(conn) != CONNECTION_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "Connection to database failed: %s",
                PQerrorMessage(conn));
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }

    /*
     * Issue LISTEN command to enable notifications from the rule's NOTIFY.
     */
    res = PQexec(conn, "LISTEN TBL2");
    if (PQresultStatus(res) != PGRES_COMMAND_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "LISTEN command failed: %s", PQerrorMessage(conn));
        PQclear(res);
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }

    /*
     * should PQclear PGresult whenever it is no longer needed to avoid memory
     * leaks
     */
    PQclear(res);

    /* Quit after four notifies are received. */
    nnotifies = 0;
7518
    while (nnotifies < 4)
7519
    {
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7520
        /*
7521 7522 7523
         * Sleep until something happens on the connection.  We use select(2)
         * to wait for input, but you could also use poll() or similar
         * facilities.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7524
         */
7525 7526
        int         sock;
        fd_set      input_mask;
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7527

7528
        sock = PQsocket(conn);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7529

7530
        if (sock < 0)
7531
            break;              /* shouldn't happen */
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7532

7533 7534
        FD_ZERO(&input_mask);
        FD_SET(sock, &input_mask);
7535

7536
        if (select(sock + 1, &input_mask, NULL, NULL, NULL) < 0)
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7537
        {
7538 7539
            fprintf(stderr, "select() failed: %s\n", strerror(errno));
            exit_nicely(conn);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7540 7541
        }

7542 7543 7544
        /* Now check for input */
        PQconsumeInput(conn);
        while ((notify = PQnotifies(conn)) != NULL)
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7545
        {
7546 7547
            fprintf(stderr,
                    "ASYNC NOTIFY of '%s' received from backend pid %d\n",
7548
                    notify->relname, notify->be_pid);
7549 7550
            PQfreemem(notify);
            nnotifies++;
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7551
        }
7552
    }
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7553

7554
    fprintf(stderr, "Done.\n");
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7555

7556 7557
    /* close the connection to the database and cleanup */
    PQfinish(conn);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7558

7559
    return 0;
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7560
}
7561
]]>
7562
</programlisting>
7563
  </example>
7564

7565
  <example id="libpq-example-3">
7566
   <title><application>libpq</application> Example Program 3</title>
7567

7568
<programlisting>
7569
<![CDATA[
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7570
/*
7571
 * testlibpq3.c
7572
 *      Test out-of-line parameters and binary I/O.
7573
 *
7574 7575
 * Before running this, populate a database with the following commands
 * (provided in src/test/examples/testlibpq3.sql):
7576
 *
7577
 * CREATE TABLE test1 (i int4, t text, b bytea);
7578
 *
7579 7580
 * INSERT INTO test1 values (1, 'joe''s place', '\\000\\001\\002\\003\\004');
 * INSERT INTO test1 values (2, 'ho there', '\\004\\003\\002\\001\\000');
7581
 *
7582
 * The expected output is:
7583
 *
7584 7585 7586 7587
 * tuple 0: got
 *  i = (4 bytes) 1
 *  t = (11 bytes) 'joe's place'
 *  b = (5 bytes) \000\001\002\003\004
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7588
 *
7589 7590 7591 7592
 * tuple 0: got
 *  i = (4 bytes) 2
 *  t = (8 bytes) 'ho there'
 *  b = (5 bytes) \004\003\002\001\000
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7593
 */
7594 7595 7596 7597
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
7598
#include <libpq-fe.h>
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7599

7600
/* for ntohl/htonl */
7601 7602
#include <netinet/in.h>
#include <arpa/inet.h>
7603 7604 7605


static void
7606
exit_nicely(PGconn *conn)
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7607
{
7608 7609
    PQfinish(conn);
    exit(1);
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7610 7611
}

7612 7613 7614 7615 7616 7617 7618
/*
 * This function prints a query result that is a binary-format fetch from
 * a table defined as in the comment above.  We split it out because the
 * main() function uses it twice.
 */
static void
show_binary_results(PGresult *res)
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7619
{
7620 7621 7622 7623 7624 7625 7626 7627 7628 7629 7630
    int         i,
                j;
    int         i_fnum,
                t_fnum,
                b_fnum;

    /* Use PQfnumber to avoid assumptions about field order in result */
    i_fnum = PQfnumber(res, "i");
    t_fnum = PQfnumber(res, "t");
    b_fnum = PQfnumber(res, "b");

7631
    for (i = 0; i < PQntuples(res); i++)
7632 7633 7634 7635 7636 7637 7638 7639 7640 7641 7642
    {
        char       *iptr;
        char       *tptr;
        char       *bptr;
        int         blen;
        int         ival;

        /* Get the field values (we ignore possibility they are null!) */
        iptr = PQgetvalue(res, i, i_fnum);
        tptr = PQgetvalue(res, i, t_fnum);
        bptr = PQgetvalue(res, i, b_fnum);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7643 7644

        /*
7645 7646
         * The binary representation of INT4 is in network byte order, which
         * we'd better coerce to the local byte order.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7647
         */
7648
        ival = ntohl(*((uint32_t *) iptr));
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7649 7650

        /*
7651 7652 7653 7654 7655 7656
         * The binary representation of TEXT is, well, text, and since libpq
         * was nice enough to append a zero byte to it, it'll work just fine
         * as a C string.
         *
         * The binary representation of BYTEA is a bunch of bytes, which could
         * include embedded nulls so we have to pay attention to field length.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7657
         */
7658 7659 7660 7661 7662 7663 7664 7665
        blen = PQgetlength(res, i, b_fnum);

        printf("tuple %d: got\n", i);
        printf(" i = (%d bytes) %d\n",
               PQgetlength(res, i, i_fnum), ival);
        printf(" t = (%d bytes) '%s'\n",
               PQgetlength(res, i, t_fnum), tptr);
        printf(" b = (%d bytes) ", blen);
7666
        for (j = 0; j < blen; j++)
7667 7668 7669 7670
            printf("\\%03o", bptr[j]);
        printf("\n\n");
    }
}
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7671

7672 7673 7674 7675 7676 7677 7678 7679 7680 7681 7682 7683 7684 7685 7686 7687
int
main(int argc, char **argv)
{
    const char *conninfo;
    PGconn     *conn;
    PGresult   *res;
    const char *paramValues[1];
    int         paramLengths[1];
    int         paramFormats[1];
    uint32_t    binaryIntVal;

    /*
     * If the user supplies a parameter on the command line, use it as the
     * conninfo string; otherwise default to setting dbname=postgres and using
     * environment variables or defaults for all other connection parameters.
     */
7688
    if (argc > 1)
7689 7690 7691 7692 7693 7694 7695 7696 7697 7698 7699 7700 7701 7702 7703 7704 7705 7706 7707 7708 7709 7710 7711 7712 7713 7714 7715 7716 7717 7718 7719 7720 7721 7722 7723 7724 7725 7726 7727 7728 7729 7730 7731 7732 7733 7734 7735 7736 7737 7738 7739 7740 7741 7742 7743 7744 7745 7746 7747 7748 7749 7750 7751
        conninfo = argv[1];
    else
        conninfo = "dbname = postgres";

    /* Make a connection to the database */
    conn = PQconnectdb(conninfo);

    /* Check to see that the backend connection was successfully made */
    if (PQstatus(conn) != CONNECTION_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "Connection to database failed: %s",
                PQerrorMessage(conn));
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }

    /*
     * The point of this program is to illustrate use of PQexecParams() with
     * out-of-line parameters, as well as binary transmission of data.
     *
     * This first example transmits the parameters as text, but receives the
     * results in binary format.  By using out-of-line parameters we can
     * avoid a lot of tedious mucking about with quoting and escaping, even
     * though the data is text.  Notice how we don't have to do anything
     * special with the quote mark in the parameter value.
     */

    /* Here is our out-of-line parameter value */
    paramValues[0] = "joe's place";

    res = PQexecParams(conn,
                       "SELECT * FROM test1 WHERE t = $1",
                       1,       /* one param */
                       NULL,    /* let the backend deduce param type */
                       paramValues,
                       NULL,    /* don't need param lengths since text */
                       NULL,    /* default to all text params */
                       1);      /* ask for binary results */

    if (PQresultStatus(res) != PGRES_TUPLES_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "SELECT failed: %s", PQerrorMessage(conn));
        PQclear(res);
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }

    show_binary_results(res);

    PQclear(res);

    /*
     * In this second example we transmit an integer parameter in binary
     * form, and again retrieve the results in binary form.
     *
     * Although we tell PQexecParams we are letting the backend deduce
     * parameter type, we really force the decision by casting the parameter
     * symbol in the query text.  This is a good safety measure when sending
     * binary parameters.
     */

    /* Convert integer value "2" to network byte order */
    binaryIntVal = htonl((uint32_t) 2);

    /* Set up parameter arrays for PQexecParams */
7752
    paramValues[0] = (char *) &binaryIntVal;
7753 7754 7755 7756 7757 7758 7759 7760 7761 7762 7763 7764 7765 7766 7767 7768 7769 7770
    paramLengths[0] = sizeof(binaryIntVal);
    paramFormats[0] = 1;        /* binary */

    res = PQexecParams(conn,
                       "SELECT * FROM test1 WHERE i = $1::int4",
                       1,       /* one param */
                       NULL,    /* let the backend deduce param type */
                       paramValues,
                       paramLengths,
                       paramFormats,
                       1);      /* ask for binary results */

    if (PQresultStatus(res) != PGRES_TUPLES_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "SELECT failed: %s", PQerrorMessage(conn));
        PQclear(res);
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7771

7772
    show_binary_results(res);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7773

7774
    PQclear(res);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7775

7776 7777
    /* close the connection to the database and cleanup */
    PQfinish(conn);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7778

7779
    return 0;
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7780
}
7781
]]>
7782
</programlisting>
7783
  </example>
7784

7785
 </sect1>
7786
</chapter>